all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 5.17 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 5.95 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
Users Manual 3 | Users Manual | 5.81 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
Users Manual 4 | Users Manual | 5.56 MiB | ||||
1 | Block Diagram | |||||||
1 | External Photos | |||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 | Test Report | |||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos |
1 | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 5.17 MiB |
Users Guide Users Guide CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series BASIC BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting on windows. ADVANCED This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments. Some features may not be available depending on models or countries. BASIC 1. Introduction Key benefits Features by models Useful to know About this users guide Safety information Machine overview Control panel overview Turning on the machine Installing the driver locally Reinstalling the driver 5 7 14 15 16 21 26 31 32 33 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup Menu overview Machines basic settings Media and tray Basic printing Basic copying Basic scanning Basic faxing 36 45 47 63 70 74 75 Using USB memory device 3. Maintenance Ordering supplies and accessories Available consumables Available accessories Available maintenance parts Storing the toner cartridge Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the waste toner container Installing accessories Monitoring the supplies life Setting the toner low alert Cleaning the machine Tips for moving & storing your machine 4. Troubleshooting Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing original document jams Clearing paper jams 79 86 87 89 90 91 93 95 98 99 103 104 105 111 113 114 119 2 BASIC Understanding the status LED Understanding display messages 5. Appendix Specifications Regulatory information Copyright 131 133 141 157 169 3 1. Introduction This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine. Key benefits Features by models Useful to know About this users guide Safety information Machine overview Control panel overview Turning on the machine Reinstalling the driver Installing the driver locally 5 7 14 15 16 21 26 31 32 33 Key benefits Environmentally friendly
- CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series For single-side printing, 24 ppm (A4) or 25 ppm (Letter). For duplex printing, 12 ppm (A4) or 12 ppm (Letter). Convenience To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature (see "Eco printing" on page 68). To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper
(see "Using advanced print features" on page 275). To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided printing) (see "Using advanced print features" on page 275). To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use. Fast high resolution printing You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600 x 600 x 4 bit). Fast, on-demand printing.
- CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series For single-side printing, 18 ppm (A4) or 19 ppm (Letter). Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard(see "Easy Capture Manager" on page 315). Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machines status and allows you to customize the machines settings (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 330or "Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager" on page 327). Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax (see
"Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 322 ). AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you use the ordinary program (see "Samsung AnyWeb Print" on page 317). Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available only for Windows. Key benefits If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads. Wide range of functionality and application support Using the USB cable or a network cable
- You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB cable or a network cable. Using the Wi-Fi Direct
- You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct feature. See "Introducing wireless set up methods" on page 196. Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 143). Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as Confidential (see "Using advanced print features" on page 275). You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on page 147). Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface. Supports various wireless network setting method Using the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button
- You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on the machine and the access point (a wireless router). Features by models Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country. Operating System Operating System CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series Windows Macintosh Linux Unix
(: Included, Blank: Not available) Software Software CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series SPL printer driver PCL printer driver PS printer drivera XPS printer drivera Features by models Software CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series Direct Printing Utility Samsung Easy Printer Manager Scan to PC settings Fax to PC settings
(CLX-419xFN Series only) Device Settings Samsung Printer Status AnyWeb Print Samsung Easy Document Creator Easy Capture Manager Samgung Easy Color Manager SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Admin Web Service Easy Eco Driver Fax Samsung Network PC Fax CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-
626xFR Series only)
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-
626xFR Series only) CLX-626xFW Series Features by models Scan Software Twain scan driver WIA scan driver Samsung Scan Assistant CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series a. For XPS/PS driver, You can install the XPS/PS printer driverin the Custom Installation window (Refer to Software CD that was provided with your machine).
(: Included, Blank: Not available) Features by models Variety feature Features CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series c c Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN IEEE 1284 parallel connectora Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LANb Eco printing Duplex (2-sided) printing USB memory interface Memory module Optional tray (Tray2) Mass Storage Device Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF)
(CLX-626xFR Series only) d Features by models Features CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Handset Fax Multi-send Delay send Priority send Duplex send Secure receive Duplex print
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-419xFN Series only) Send/ Receive forward - fax CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series
(CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
(CLX-626xFR Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
(CLX-626xFR Series only) Send/ Receive forward - email
(CLX-419xFN Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only) Features by models Features CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series Send/ Receive forward - server Scan Scanning to email Scanning to SMB server Scanning to FTP server Duplex scan Scan to PC Copy ID card copying Reduced or enlarged copying Collation Poster Clone Book 2-up/4-up Adjust background Margin shift CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series only)
(CLX-626xFR Series only) CLX-626xFW Series Features by models Features Edge erase Gray enhance Duplex copy CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series a. If you use the parallel port, you cannot use the USB cable. b. Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine. c. Available for Windows OS Duplex (2-sided) printing (Manual) only. d. The machine is equipped with 4GB of SD (secure digital) card.
( : Included, : Optional, Blank: Not available) Useful to know The machine does not print. A paper jam has occurred. Open the print queue list and remove the document from the list (see "Canceling a print job" on page 65). Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 32). Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows
(see "Setting your machine as a default machine" on page 274). Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?
Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer. Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region to view product service information. Open and close the door (see "Front view" on page 22). Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 119). Printouts are blurry. The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner cartridge (see "Redistributing toner" on page 93). Try a different print resolution setting (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). The status LED flashes or remains constantly on. Where can I download the machines driver?
Turn the product off and on again. Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Understanding the status LED"
on page 131). You can get help, support application, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads. About this users guide This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage. 2 General icons Icon Text Description Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction. Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature. Read the safety information before using the machine. If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter. Terms used in this users guide are explained in the glossary chapter. All illustrations in this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or model you purchased. The screenshots in this administrators guide may differ from your machine depending on the machines firmware/driver version. The procedures in this users guide are mainly based on Windows 7. 1 Conventions Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
Document is synonymous with original. Paper is synonymous with media, or print media. Machine refers to printer or MFP. 1. Introduction 15 Safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference. 4 Operating environment Warning 3 Important safety symbols Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death. Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Do not attempt. Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded. This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.). This could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine. The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out. This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the plug with wet hands. This could result in electric shock or fire. 1. Introduction 16 Safety information Caution 5 Operating method During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet. This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution Be careful, the paper output area is hot. Burns could occur. If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not attempt to force it in. Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could result in electric shock. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords. This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet. Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing. It can cause damage to the machine. Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray. You may get injured. Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper. New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts. When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch. Burns can occur. When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects. It can damage the machine. Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray. It can damage the machine. 1. Introduction 17 Safety information Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening. This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This machine's power reception device is the power cord. To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet. 6 Installation / Moving Warning Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water leaks. This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the units weight. If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate amount of people to lift the device safety. Then lift the machine:
If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person. If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 2 people. If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or more people. The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Do not place the machine on an unstable surface. The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Use only No.26 AWGa or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. 1. Introduction 18 Safety information Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6 feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in electric shock or fire. Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location, such as a closet. If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or fire. The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label. If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using, contact the electrical utility company. a. AWG: American Wire Gauge 7 Maintenance / Checking Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the machine. This could result in electric shock or fire. When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine. You could get injured. Keep cleaning supplies away from children. Children could get hurt. Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself. It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the machine needs repairing. To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide provided with the machine. Otherwise, you could damage the machine. 1. Introduction 19 Safety information Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws. Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in fire or electric shock. The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician. 8 Supply usage Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit. This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire. When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away from children. Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the machine. In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service fee will be charged. When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash it. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water. When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper, be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes. Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. 1. Introduction 20 Machine overview 9 Accessories Power cord Quick installation guide Software CDa Misc. accessoriesb a. The software CD contains the print drivers, users guide, and software applications. b. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model. 1. Introduction 21 Machine overview 10 Front view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model. There are various types of machine. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7). CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-419xFW/ CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series
12 11 10 1 2 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Document feeder cover 11 Document feeder output support Document feeder width guide 12 Front cover handle Document feeder input tray 13 Scanner lid Document feeder output tray 14 Scanner glass Control panel 15 Paper width guides on a manual feeder USB memory port 16 Manual feeder Control board cover 17 Toner cartridge Front cover Tray 1 18 Toner cartridge handle 19 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) 10 Output tray 1. Introduction 22 Machine overview CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series 1 2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 2 3 Dual Automatic Document Feeder(DADF) cover Dual Automatic Document Feeder(DADF) width guide Dual Automatic Document Feeder(DADF) input tray 23 13 14 15 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Output tray Document feeder output support Front cover handle 4 5 6 7 8 9 Dual Automatic Document Feeder(DADF) output tray 16 Scanner lid Control panel 17 Scanner glass USB memory port 18 Paper width guides on a multi-
purpose tray Control board cover 19 Multi-purpose support tray Front cover Tray 1 10 Push-release of Multi-purpose tray 20 21 22 Toner cartridge Toner cartridge handle Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) 11 Multi-purpose tray 23 Duplex jam cover 12 Optional traya a. This is an optional feature. CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Seriesonly. 1. Introduction 23 Machine overview 11 Rear view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model. There are various types of machine. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7). CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series 9 10 9 10 8 7 5 4 8 7 6 5 4 1 1 1 23 3 2 1. Introduction 24 Machine overview 1 Waster toner container 2 Rear cover 3 Rear cover handle 4 5 6 Power receptacle Power-switch 7 USB portb 8 Network port 5V output port for IEEE 1284 parallel connectorab 9 Telephone line socket (LINE)c a. This is an optional feature.CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Seriesonly. b. The optional IEEE 1284 paraller connector can be used by plugging in both the USB port and the 5V output port. c. CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Seriesonly. 10 Extension telephone socket (EXT.)c 1. Introduction 25 Control panel overview 12 This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. There are various types of control panels. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7). Some buttons may not work depending on the mode (copy, fax, or scan). Type A(CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 6 14 13 1 Darkness 2 ID Copya Scan tob Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading, when the original contains faint markings and dark images. Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a drivers license on a single side of paper (see "ID card copying" on page 73). Sends scanned data. 1. Introduction 26 Control panel overview 3 Display screen Shows the current status and prompts during an operation. 4 5 Faxa Copya 6 Arrows 7 OK Switches to Fax mode. Switches to Copy mode. Scroll through the options available in the selected menu, and increase or decrease values. Confirms the selection on the screen. 8 Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 269). 9 Address Book 10 11 12 13 14 Redial/Pausea Stop/Clear Power Start Color Black On Hook Diala Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or search for stored fax numbers (see "Storing email address" on page 267 or "Setting up the fax address book" on page 270). Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode (see "Redialing the fax number" on page 300). Stops current operation. Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this button for more than three seconds. Begins a printing job in color mode. Begins a printing job in black and white mode. When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone (see "Receiving manually in Tel mode" on page 306). 1. Introduction 27 Control panel overview 15 Back 16 Menu Scana 17 18 Toner colors Sends you back to the upper menu level. Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (see "Menu overview" on page 36). Switches to Scan mode. Show the status of each toner cartridge. If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced, the Status LED turns red and the display shows the message. However, the arrow mark shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new cartridge (see "Toner-related messages" on page 134). 19 Status LED Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 131). 20 21 Eco Direct USB Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc-printing and copying only (see "Eco printing"
on page 68). Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your machine. a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only. b. CLX-419xN/ CLX-626xND Series only. 1. Introduction 28 Control panel overview Type B(CLX-419xFW/ CLX-626xFW Series) 13 1 Display screen Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation. 2 Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 269). 3 4 5 Clear Deletes characters in the edit area. Stop/Clear Power Stops an operations at any time. Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this button for more than three seconds. 1. Introduction 29 Control panel overview 6 7 Start On Hook Dial 8 Help 9 Reset 10 Wireless LED 11 Status LED Starts a job in black or color mode. When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone
(see "Receiving manually in Tel mode" on page 306). Gives detailed information about this machines menus or status. Resets the current machines setup. Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 131). Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 131). 1. Introduction 30 Turning on the machine Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). 1 Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. 2 Turn the power switch on. 2 1 1. Introduction 31 Installing the driver locally A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network connected machines driver (see
"Installing driver over the network" on page 183). If you are a Macintosh Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
"Installation for Macintosh" on page 174 or "Installation for Linux" on page 176 or "Installing the UNIX printer driver package" on page 189. The installation window in this Users Guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use. Selecting Custom Installation allows you to choose which programs to install. When the installation window appears, select Custom Installation. You can select the XPS/PS printer driver or other software applications in the Select Software window. Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches). Windows 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. If the Found New Hardware Wizard appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel to close the window. 14 2 3 4 5 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run. X:\Setup.exe replacing X with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK. Select Install Now. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. Follow the instructions in the installation window. 1. Introduction 32 Reinstalling the driver If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall the driver. 15 Windows 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 3 4 From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall. Follow the instructions in the installation window. Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 32). 1. Introduction 33 Reinstalling the driver 1. Introduction 34 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options. Menu overview Machines basic settings Media and tray Basic printing Basic copying Basic scanning Basic faxing Using USB memory device 36 46 48 64 71 75 76 80 Menu overview The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machines functions. An checked () appears next to the currently selected menu. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models. The menus are described in the Advanced Guide (see "Useful Setting Menus" on page 232). 1 CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series Accessing the menu Select
(Menu) until the menu you want appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK. Press the arrows until the needed menu item appears and press OK. 1 Select the Fax, Copy, or Scan button on the control panel depending on the feature to be used. 2 3 4 5 6 If the setting item has sub menus, repeat step 3.
(Stop/Clear) to return to the ready mode. Press OK to save the selection. Press 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 36 Menu overview Fax Featurea Fax Setupa Darkness Send Forward Sending Forward to Faxc Forward to Emailc Forward to Serverc Receive Forward Forward to Faxc Forward to PC Forward to Emailc Forward to Serverc Forward & Print Secure Receive Off On Print Cancel Job Redial Times Redial Term Prefix Dial ECM Mode Fax Confirmation Image TCR Dial Moded Toll Save Receiving Receive Mode Ring to Answer Stamp RCV Name Rcv Start Code Auto Reduction Light+5- Light+1 Normal Dark+1- Dark+5 Original Type Text Text/Photo Photo Resolution Standard Fine Super Fine Original Size Duplexb 1 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided Rotated Multi Send Delay Send a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only. b. CLX-626xFR Series only. c. CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only. d. This option may not be available depending on your country. Discard Size DRPD Modede Duplex Printb Original Size Reduce/Enlarge Duplexb Change Default Resolution Darkness Original Type Original Size 1 Sided 1->2Sided 1->2Sided Rotated 2->1Sided 2->2Sided 2->1Sided Rotated Auto Color Darkness Light+5- Light+1 Normal Dark+1- Dark+5 Original Type Text/Photo Text Photo Magazine Stampc Item Opacity Position WaterMarkc Message Pages Color Size Position Darkness Copy Feature Layout Normal 2-Up 4-Up ID Copy BookCopyc Adjust Bkgd Off Auto Enhance Lev.1 Enhance Lev.2 Erase Lev.1- Erase Lev.4 Edge Erasec Off Small Original Hole Punch Book Center Border Erase 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 37 Menu overview e. CLX-419xFN Series only. Copy Setup Scan Feature Change Default Original Size Copies Copy Collation Reduce/Enlarge Duplexa 1 Sided 1->2Sided 1->2Sided Rotated 2->1Sided 2->2Sided 2->1Sided Rotated Auto Color Darkness Light+5- Light+1 Normal Dark+1- Dark+5 Original Type Text/
Photo Text Photo Magazine USB Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplexa Darkness Email Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplexa Darkness FTP Featureb Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness SMB Featureb Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness a. CLX-626xFR Series only. b. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only. Scan Setup Change Default USB Default Email Default FTP/SMB Defaultb Server Confirmation On-Error On Off Print Setup Trapping Normal Off Minimum Maximum Screen Normal Enhanced Detailed Emulation Emulation Type Setup Orientation Portrait Landscape Copies Resolution Draft Normal Best Clear Text Normal Off Minimum Maximum Edge Enhance Normal Off Maximum 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 38 Menu overview Machine Setup Machine ID Fax Numbera Date & Time Clock Mode Language Default Mode Power Save Wakeup Event System Timeout Job Timeout Altitude Adjustment Auto Continue Auto CR Auto Tray Switchb Paper Substitutionc Tray Protectionb Skip Blank Pages PDF Typeb System Setup Network Stampb Import Setting Export Setting Eco Settings Paper Setup Paper Size Paper Type Tray 1 Tray 2d MP Trayb Manual Feedere Change Default Paper Source Margin Tray Confirm Sound Key Sound Alarm Sound Fax Sounda Report Configuration Supplies Info. Demo Page Address Book Fax Send Confirmationa Fax Senta Fax Optionsa E-mail Sent Fax Receiveda Fax Schedule Jobsa Network Configuration PCL Font PS Font Usage Counter Account Maintenance CLR Empty Msg.f Supplies Life Image Mgr. Custom Color Default Auto Tone Adj. Manual Tone Adj. Standard tone Cal. ID Sensor TonerLow Alert Serial Number Clear Setting All Settings Fax Setupa Copy Setup Scan Setup System Setup Network Setup Address Book Fax Senta E-mail Sent Fax Receiveda Job Manage.b Active Job Secured Job Stored Job Network Configuration Net. Activate Http Activate WINS SNMP V1/V2 SNTP UPNP MDNS SetIP SLP TCP/IP (IPv4) DHCP BOOTP Static TCP/IP (IPv6) IPv6 Activate DHCPv6 Config Ethernet Speed Automatic 10Mbps Half 10Mbps Full 100Mbps Half 100Mbps Full 1Gbps Full 802.1x Clear Settings 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 39 Menu overview a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only. b. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only. c. This option only appears if Auto Continue > 0 sec is enabled. d. This is an optional feature.CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR Series only. e. CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series only. f. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. 2 CLX-419xFW/ CLX-626xFW Series You can set menus easily using the touch screen. The Main screen is shown on the touch screen on the control panel. Some menus are grayed out depending on your options or models. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models. Introducing the Home Screen
(Copy): When you press Copy from the display screen, the Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options.
(Scan): When you press Scan from the display screen, the Scan screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Scanning options.
(Fax): When you press Fax from the display screen, the Fax screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Faxing options. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 40 Menu overview
(Setup): You can browse current machine settings or change machine values.
(Job Status): Job status shows the jobs currently running, completed job or in queue.
(Eco): You can view the eco settings.
(Direct USB): Enters the USB menu when USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine.
(Document Box): You can store the printing data, print the secure page or shared folder.
: Shows the toner status
: Selects the LCD brightness, language, and diagnostic.
: Scroll through available options. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 41 Menu overview Basic Copy Darkness Original Type Text Text/Photo Photo Magazine Color Mode Auto Color Mono Custom Copy Duplexa Reduce/Enlarge Darkness Color Mode Original Size Original Type Tray a. CLX-626xFW Series only. Copy Layout Adjust Background Edge Erasea Stampa Watermarka ID Copy Darkness Original Type Color Mode Color Mono Auto Fit Copy Darkness Original Type Color Mode Collate Copy Duplexa Darkness Color Mode Original Size Original Type N-up Copy Duplexa Darkness Color Mode Original Size Original Type N-Up Book Copya Darkness Color Mode Original Size Original Type Book Copy Manual Send Delayed Send Group Dial Send Fax To Darkness Resolution Duplexa Original Type Original Size Color Mode On Hook Dial To Darkness Resolution Duplexa Original Type Original Size Color Mode To Darkness Resolution Duplexa Original Type Original Size SpeedDial Send To Darkness Resolution Duplexa Original Type Original Size Color Mode To Darkness Resolution Duplexa Original Type Original Size Color Mode Redial To Darkness Resolution Duplexa Original Type Original Size Color Mode 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 42 Menu overview Scan to Local PC Destination Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplexa Original Size Original Type Darkness Scan to Network PC Destination Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplexa Original Size Original Type Darkness a. CLX-626xFW Series only. Scan to Email To Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplexa Darkness File Name Scan to SMBa Destination Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Scan Duplexa Darkness File Name Scan to FTPa Destination Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplexa Darkness File Name Scan to Custom Email To Subject From CC BCC Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplexa Darkness File Name Scan to USB Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Name File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplexa Darkness File Policy Eco Eco-On On Off On-Forced Settings Default Mode Feature Configuration Scan to Shared Foldera Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Name File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplexa Darkness File Policy Scan to WSD 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 43 Menu overview Direct USB Print From Machine Setup File Navigation Auto Fit Copies Duplexa Select Tray Color Mode Scan to USB Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Name File Format Duplexa Darkness File Policy File Manage Show Space Default Setting Copy Default Scan Default Fax Default Paper Setup Tray1 Tray2b MP Traya Manual Feederc Margin Tray Behaviour Auto Tray Switcha Paper Substitution Auto Continue Tray Protectiona Address Book PhoneBook Email a. CLX-626xFW Series only. b. This is an optional feature.CLX-626xFW Series only. c. CLX-419xFW Series only. Print Reset Reports Cofiguration Supplies Information Demo Page Help List Address Book Fax Confirmation Fax Sent Email Sent Fax Received Fax Schedule Jobs Network Configuration PCL Font List PS Font List Usage Counter Account Setup Fax Setup Send Forward Receive Forward Toll Save Secure Receive Prefix Dial Stmp Rcvd Name ECM Mode Modem Speed Image TCR Setup Wizard Network Setup Ethernet Speed TCP/IP (IPv4) TCP/IP (IPv6) 802.1x Ethernet Activate Http Activate WINS SNMP V1/V2 SNTP UPNP MDNS SetIP SLP Wireless Wi-Fi ON/OFF Wi-Fi Direct On/ Off Device Name IP Address Group Owner Network Key Status WPS Settings Connect via PBC Connect via PIN WLAN Settings WLAN Defaults WLAN Signal Clear Settings Print Setup Orientation Copies Resolution Clear Text Edge Enhance Trapping Screen Emulation Select Tray 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 44 Menu overview Initial Setup Machine ID Select Country Language Date&Time Clock Mode Default Mode Sound/Volume Power Save Wakeup Event System Timeout Import Setting Export Setting a. CLX-626xFW Series only. Setup Toner Status Alert Skip Blank Pages Job Timeout Altitude Adjustment Auto CR Firmware Version PDF Type ImageOverwrite Default Paper Size CLR Empty Msg Image Management Restore Options Copy Default Fax Default Scan Default Sent Report Rcvd Report Admin Setup Copy System Boxes Job Status Document Boxa Stored Print Secured Print Shared Folder Box list navigation Search/Sort Duplex Select Tray Copies Color Mode User Access Control Off Network Authentication Local Authentication Network Accounting Stampa Item Opacity Position Chang Admin. Password Troubleshooting Language Show Job List Detail Infor Job Cancel Manaul Fax Tx Memory Fax Tx Fax Reserved Job Fax Rx Scan to Email Scan to Server Scan to USB PC Print USB Print Report Print Paper Mismatch Scan Another Completed Job 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 45 Machines basic settings You can set the machines settings by using the Device Settings in
program. For Windows and Macintosh users, see "Device Settings" on page 329.
- For Windows and Macintosh users, you set from Samsung Easy
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Printer Manager Settings, see "Device Settings" on page 329. After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default settings. To change the machines default settings, follow these steps:
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. 1 Select 2
(Menu) button on the control panel. Press System Setup > Machine Setup. 3 Select the option you want, then press OK. Language: change the language that is displayed on the control panel. Date & Time: When you set the time and date, they are used in delay fax and delay print. They are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need to change it for the correct time being. Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad (see
"Keypad letters and numbers" on page 269). Month = 01 to 12 Day = 01 to 31 Year = requires four digits Hour = 01 to 12 Minute = 00 to 59 Clock Mode: You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12-hour or 24-hour format. Power Save: When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save power. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 46 Machines basic settings When you press the power button, start printing, or a fax is received, the product will wake up from the power saving mode. Press
(Menu) > System Setup > MachineSetup>Wakeup Event
>Button Press >On on the control panel. When you press any button except power button, the machine wake up from the power save mode. Altitude Adjust: Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are(see "Altitude adjustment" on page 266). 4 5 6 Select the option you want, then press OK. Press OK to save the selection. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine. See "Entering various characters" on page 269. See "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 269. See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 58. See "Setting up the fax address book" on page 270. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 47 Media and tray This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine. 3 Tray overview Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsungs warranty or service agreements. Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine. Using inflammable print media can cause a fire. Use designated print media(see "Print media specifications" on page 143). Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine. The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and in rare cases may cause a fire. To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides. CLX-419xN/ CLP-419xFN Series CLP-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series 2 1 2 1 4 3 3 1 Tray extend lever 2 Paper length guide 3 Paper width guide 4 Paper width guides on a manual feeder 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 48 Media and tray For Legal-sized paper Push button as shown and pull out the tray. Loading paper in the tray Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). 4 Tray 1 / optional tray 1 Pull out the paper tray. LGL Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Tray overview" on page 48). If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew, or jamming of the paper. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 49 Media and tray 2 Hold the tray with one hand, and with the other hand squeeze and slide the paper length guide to locate them in the correct paper size slot marked at the bottom of the tray (see "Tray overview" on page 48) 4 After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the paper width guides and paper length guide. CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series 3 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. 2 2 1 1 CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series 1 Paper length guide 2 Paper width guide CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 50 Media and tray Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp. If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams. 5 Insert the tray back into the machine. Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause a paper jam or the paper can be wrinkled. 6 When you print a document, set the paper type and size for tray (see
"Setting the paper size and type" on page 58). The settings set from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel. a To print from an application, open an application and start the print menu. b Open Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type. For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label. d Select Auto Select in paper source, then press OK. e Start printing in application. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 51 Media and tray Multi-purpose (or Manual feeder ) tray 1 Hold the handle of multi-purpose tray and pull it down to open. The multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media specifications" on page 143). If you want to print from the manual feeder for CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/
CLX-419xFW Series, there should be paper in the tray1. Tips on using the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the multi-
purpose (or manual feeder) tray. To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still paper in the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray. This also applies to other types of print media. Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems (see "Print media specifications" on page 143). Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray. OR Pull out the paper tray for manual feeding. CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 52 Media and tray 2 Load the paper. 3 Squeeze the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much, or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew. 1 2 CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline
(See "Printing on special media" on page 54). When papers overlap when printing using Multi-purpose tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try printing again. When paper does not feed well while printing, push the paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 53 Media and tray 4 When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the multi-
purpose tray. For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel (see "Setting the paper size and type" on page 58). The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel. a To print in application, open an application and start the print menu. b Open Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type. For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label. d Select MP Tray (or Manual Feeder) in paper source, then press OK. e Start printing in application. If your machine has multi-purpose tray, press OKon the control panel each time you load a sheet of paper. 5 Printing on special media The table below shows the special media usable in tray. The media is also shown in the Printing Preferences. To get the highest printing quality, select the proper media type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab > Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). For example, if you want to print on labels, select Labels for Paper Type. When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time
(see "Print media specifications" on page 143). Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see
"Front view" on page 22). To see for paper weights for each sheet, refer to "Print media specifications" on page 143. Types Tray 1 Optional traya Manual feeder/ Multi-
purpose tray Plain Thick Thicker Thin Bond Color CardStock Labels Transparency 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 54 Media and tray Types Tray 1 Optional traya Manual feeder/ Multi-
purpose tray To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure. Envelope Preprinted Cotton Recycled Archive Letterhead Punched Glossy Photo a. CLX-626xND /CLX-626xFD /CLX-626xFR /CLX-626xFW Series only.
(: Supported, Blank: Not supported) Envelope Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
- Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise; jams may occur.
-
Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air. Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged. Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the machine during operation.
-
-
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds. Do not use stamped envelopes. Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials. Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 55
1 | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 5.95 MiB |
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope. To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers. Media and tray 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machines fusing temperature for 0.1 second about 170C (338 F). The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser. For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelopes seams meet. Transparency In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would be lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead projector. CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series Must withstand the machines fusing temperature. Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine. Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing. To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully. To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight. Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges. Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet. To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are being printed out. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 56 Media and tray Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox, such as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780 (Letter).
-
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. Labels To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser printers. Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components. Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine. Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged. Card stock/ Custom-sized paper CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
-
-
-
Adhesives: Should be stable at your machines fusing temperature about 170C (338F). Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction. CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 57 Media and tray Preprinted paper Glossy Photo When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed. Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only. Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A). 6 Setting the paper size and type A A A A A After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the control panel buttons. CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machines fusing temperature for 0.1 second (about 170C (338F)). Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality. You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in
program.
- For Windows and Macintosh users, you set from Samsung Easy
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Printer Manager Settings, see "Device Settings" on page 329. It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 58 Media and tray 1 Select Paper Type on the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper Size or Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Paper Setup > select a tray >
Paper Size or Paper Type on the touch screen. Select the tray and the option you want. Press OK to save the selection. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. The settings set from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel. a To print from an application, open an application and start the print menu. b Open Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). c Press the Paper taband select an appropriate paper. If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select the Paper tab > Size > Edit... and set CustomPaper Size Settings in the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). 2 3 4 Using the output support The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not allow children near it. 7 The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help the printed pages to align. Unfold the output support. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 59 Media and tray Preparing originals 9 Loading originals Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for copying, scanning, and sending a fax. 8 Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to prevent paper jam, low print quality and machine damage.
-
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper Coated paper
- Onion skin or thin paper
- Wrinkled or creased paper
-
-
Curled or rolled paper Torn paper Remove all staples and paper clips before loading. Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading. Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper. Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other unusual characteristics. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). On the scanner glass Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images.Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 60 Media and tray 1 Lift and open the scanner lid. 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass. 3 Close the scanner lid. Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption. Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always keep it clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the scanner lid open. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 61 2 Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray. Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray. Media and tray Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt. Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall on your hands and get hurt. Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or scanning. It is harmful to eyes. In the document feeder Using the document feeder, you can load up to 50 sheets of paper (80 g/m2, 20 lbs bond) for one job. 1 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 62 Media and tray 3 Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size. Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always keep the glass clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 63 Basic printing For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using advanced print features" on page 275). 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list. Printing If you are a MacintoshLinux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Macintosh printing" on page 284, "Linux printing" on page 285 or "Unix printing" on page 287). 10 The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7. 1 Open the document you want to print. 2 Select Print from the File menu. 4 5 The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window. To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or Preferences from the Print window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 64 Basic printing 11 Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows:
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
(
) in the Windows task bar. You can also cancel the current job by pressing
(Stop/Clear) on the control panel. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 65 Basic printing Opening printing preferences The Printing Preferences window that appears in this users guide may differ depending on the machine in use. When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a or warning mark option but it is not recommended, and an select that option due to the machines setting or environment. mark means you can select that certain mark means you cannot
. An 12 Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears. 1 Open the document you want to print. 2 3 4 Click Properties or Preferences. Select your machine from the Select Printer. The screenshot may differ depending on model. You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see
"Easy Eco Driver" on page 318). You can check the machines current status pressing the Printer Status button (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 330). 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 66 Basic printing Using a favorite setting The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use. To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:
1 Change the settings as needed on each tab. 2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box. To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set to print according to the settings you have selected. To delete saved settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete. 13 Using help Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and press F1 on your keyboard. 3 Click Save. 4 5 Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved. Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 67 Basic printing 14 Eco printing The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco function allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing. If you press the Eco button from the control panel, eco mode is enabled. The default setting of Eco mode is duplex (CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR/
CLX-626xFW Series only), Multiple Pages per Side (2-up), Skip Blank Pages. You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in
program. For Windows and Macintosh users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings, see Manager
"Device Settings" on page 329. Setting Eco mode on the control panel The settings set from the machines driver override the settings on the control panel. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 36). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. 1 Select the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco Settings on Or select Eco > Settings on the touch screen. 2 Select the option you want and press OK. Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the eco mode.
- Off: Set the eco mode off.
- On: Set the eco mode on. If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru Web Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco > Settings) or
(Device Settings > Eco), the On force message appears. You have to enter the password to change the eco mode status. Change Template: Follow the settings from Syncthru Web Service or . Before you select this item, you must set the eco function in SyncThru Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco > Settings) or
(Device Settings > Eco).
-
Select Template Default Eco: The machine is set to Default Eco mode. Custom Eco: Change any necessary values. 3 Press OK to save the selection. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 68 Basic printing Setting eco mode on the driver Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode. When you see the eco image (
means the eco mode is currently enabled.
), that The actual amount displayed is only an estimate as the actual amount may differ depending on the operating system used, computing performance, application software, connection method, media type [thickness], media size, job complexity, etc. 15 Eco options Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control panel. Secure printing None: Disables Eco mode. Eco Printing: Enables eco mode. Activate the various Eco items you want to use. Password: If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode, you have to enter the password to change the status. Result simulator Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you selected. The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled. Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and paper from IEA, the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each model has a different index. The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing power consumption of this machine. When you use a printing device in an office, school or other public place, you can protect your personal documents or confidential information by using the secure printing feature. Starting secure printing on the driver Open the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66), and the select Advanced tab > Print Mode > Confidential. Enter the job name, user ID, and password. Even though you have started the secure printing job, the device will not print the document until you enter your password on the printer. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 69 Basic printing You can use this feature after installing the optional memory. If you did not install optional memory, you can set the menus as shown below:
- From a computer, select a printer from the printer list > right-click the printer > select Properties > Device Options > Properties > Storage Options. Then check the Ram Disk option (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). Printing secure documents from the control panel 1 Select printers control panel.
(Menu > System Setup > Job Manage > Secured Job on the 2 3 4 Select the document to print. Enter the password that you set from the printer driver. Print or delete the document. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 70 Basic copying 16 For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Copy" on page 235). 17 Changing the settings for each copy Basic copy 1 Select
(copy) on the control panel. Or select Copy > Basic Copy on the touch screen. 2 3 4 5 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge, Darkness, Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons
(see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 71). Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if necessary. Press
(Start). If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press Clear) and the copying will stop.
(Stop/
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and easily make a copy.
(Stop/Clear) button twice while setting the copy If you press the options, all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 36). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. Darkness If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 71 Basic copying 1 Select control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
screen.
(settings) >Darkness on the touch Select the option you want and press OK. For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5 being the darkest. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 2 3 Original Type The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the document for the current copy job. 1 Select control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
touch screen.
(settings) > Original Type on the 2 Select the option you want and press OK. Text: Use for originals containing mostly text. Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs. 3 If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear texts. Photo: Use when the originals are photographs. Magazine: Use when the originals are magazines. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. Reduced or enlarged copy You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% from the document feeder or scanner glass. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Variety feature" on page 10). If the machine set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not available. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 72 Basic copying To select from the predefined copy sizes 1 Select the control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on Or select Copy > Custom Copy >
the touch screen.
(settings) > Reduce/Enlarge on 2 3 Select the option you want and press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate 18 ID card copying Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet. The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature. If the machine set to Eco mode, this feature is not available. 1 Select Custom on the control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge >
Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ. Or select Copy > Custom Copy >
Custom on the touch screen.
(settings) > Reduce/Enlarge >
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad. Press OK to save the selection. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy. 2 3 4 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 73 Basic copying 1 Press ID Copy on the control panel. Or select Copy > ID Copy on the touch screen. 5 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid. 2 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid. 3 Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display. 4
(Start). Press Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side and Press [Start]. 6 Press
(Start) button.
(Start) button, only the front side will be If you do not press the copied. If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be printed. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 74 Basic scanning For special scanning features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Scan features" on page 290). 19 Basic Scanning This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals. This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine. Accessing menus may differ from model to model. It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. If you want to scan using the network, refer to the Advanced Guide (see
"Scanning from network connected machine" on page 291). 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 Select
(scan) > Scan To PC on the control panel. Or select Scan > Scan to Local PC on the touch screen. 3 4 5 If you see Not Available message, check the port connectionor select Enable Scan from Device Panel in Switch to advanced modeScan to Settings. Select the scan destination you want and press OK. Default setting is My Documents. You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list. Also you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different path. To change the Switch to advanced modeScan to Settings. Select the option you want and press OK. Scanning begins. Scanned image is saved in computers C:\Users\users name\My Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 75 Basic faxing This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/CLX-626xND Series (see
"Control panel overview" on page 26). For special faxing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Fax features" on page 300). You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more information ask your internet service provider. We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone lines to use a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro-
filter. 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem / Telephone line
(see "Rear view" on page 24). 20 Preparing to fax Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to your telephone wall jack (see "Rear view" on page 24). Refer to the Quick Installation Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a telephone connection is different from one country to another. 21 Sending a fax When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder or the scanner glass. If the originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first, which has higher priority in scanning. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 Select
(fax) on the control panel. Or select Fax > Manual Send >
(settings) on the touch screen. 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 78). 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 76 Basic faxing 4 5 Enter the destination fax number (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 269). 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 78). Press send the fax to the destinations.
(Start) on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use Samsung Network PC Fax (see "Sending a fax in the computer" on page 301). When you want to cancel a fax job, press
(Stop/Clear) before the machine starts transmission. If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to place another page. 4 5 6 Press
(On Hook Dial) on the control panel or lift the handset. Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel. Press signal from the remote fax machine.
(Start) on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax Sending a fax to multiple destinations You can use the multiple send feature, which allows you to send a fax to multiple locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased from memory. Sending a fax manually Perform the following to send a fax using panel.
(On Hook Dial) on the control You cannot send faxes with this feature if you chosen super fine as an option or if the fax is in color. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 Select
(fax) on the control panel. 2 Select
(fax) on the control panel. Or select Fax > On Hook Dial >
(settings) on the touch screen. Or select Fax > SpeedDial Send or Group Dial Send >
the touch screen.
(settings) on 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 77 Basic faxing 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 78). 22 Receiving a fax Select
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the control panel. Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK. You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using the
(Address book) button. Enter the second fax number and press OK. The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat steps 5 and 6. You can add up to 10 destinations. Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group dial number. 4 5 6 7 8 When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK. The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the order in which you entered them. Multi send report is printed after sending faxes. Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax. 23 Adjusting the document settings Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your originals status to get the best quality. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. Resolution The default document settings produce good results when using typical text-
based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 78 Basic faxing The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default setting (see Advanced Guide). 1 Select panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on the control Color Fax: Original with colors. Memory transmission is not available in this mode. You can only send a color fax if the machine you are communicating with supports color fax reception and you send the fax manually. Or select Fax > select a fax such as Manual Send, On Hook Dial, Delayed Send, or etc. >
(settings) > Resolution on the touch screen. 3 Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 2 Select the option you want and press OK. Darkness Standard: Originals with normal sized characters. You can select the degree of darkness of the original document. Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals printed using a dot-matrix printer. Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution. For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine. When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine resolution, the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine. Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of gray or photographs. The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default setting (see "Fax" on page 241). 1 Select panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the control Or select Fax > select a fax such as Manual Send, On Hook Dial, Delayed Send, or etc. >
(settings) > Darkness on the touch screen. 2 3 Select a darkness level you want. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 79 Using USB memory device This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine. You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector. 24 About USB memory USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and videos, high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move. You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device. Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device Print data stored on a USB memory device Restore backup files to the machines memory Format the USB memory device Check the available memory space 25 Plugging in a USB memory device The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes. Check your USB memory devices file system from your dealer. A B Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device. Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification;
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it. Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by users misuse. If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see the users guide of the USB memory device. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 80 Using USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device Scanning 26 Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 36) It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device. 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60 ). 3 Select
(scan) > Scan To USB > OK on the control panel. Or select Scan > Scat to USB > Next > Start on the touch screen. The machine begins scanning. After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from the machine. Customizing Scan to USB You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to USB job. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 81 Using USB memory device 1 Select control panel.
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the Press 5 You can change the default scan settings. Refer to the Advanced Guide.
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. Or select Direct USB > Scan to USB >
(settings) on the touch screen. 2 Select the setting option you want appears. Original Size: Sets the image size. Original Type: Sets the original documents . Resolution: Sets the image resolution. Color Mode: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option, you cannot select JPEG in File Format. File Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages. If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in Color Mode. Duplex: Sets the duplex mode. Darkness: Sets the brightness level to scan an original. File Name: Sets the file name. File Policy: Sets the policy to save files between overwirting or renaming PDF Encryption: Sets the encrypts PDF files. 3 4 Select the desired status you want and press OK. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options. 27 Printing from a USB memory device You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. File s supported by Direct Print option. PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible. If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout would be different. BMP: BMP Uncompressed TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline JPEG: JPEG Baseline PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version. XPS 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 82 Using USB memory device To print a document from a USB memory device Backing up data 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine, and then press Direct USB. 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Select USB Print. Select the folder or file you want and press OK. If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder. Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number. Press OK, Start or Print to start printing the selected file. After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job. 2 3 4 Select Export Setting on the control panel.
(scan) >
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup >
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Export Setting on the touch screen. Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK. The data is backed up to the USB memory. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2. Restoring data Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 1 Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB memory port. 28 Backing up data Data in the machines memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage failure. Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB memory device. 2 3 Select Import Setting on the control panel.
(scan) >
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup >
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Import Setting on the touch screen. Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 83 Using USB memory device Select the file you want to restore and press OK. Deleting an image file Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 4 5 6 29 Managing USB memory You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device. If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder. After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot be restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it. For touch screen model, select > select a file >
the touch screen.
(settings) > Delete on 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine, and then press Direct USB. 2 3 4 5 Select File Manage > Delete and press OK. Select the file you want to delete and press OK. Select Yes. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. Formatting a USB memory device For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage > Next > select a file >
(settings) > Format on the touch screen. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 84 Using USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine, and then press Direct USB. 2 3 4 Select File Manage > Format and press OK. Select Yes. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. Viewing the USB memory status You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents. For touch screen model, select Direct USB > Show Space > Next on the touch screen. 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine, and then press Direct USB. 2 3 4 Select Check Space . The available memory space appears on the display. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 85 3. Maintenance This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine. Ordering supplies and accessories Available consumables Available accessories Available maintenance parts Storing the toner cartridge Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the waste toner container Monitoring the supplies life Setting the toner low alert Cleaning the machine Tips for moving & storing your machine Installing accessories 86 87 89 90 91 93 95 98 99 103 104 105 110 Ordering supplies and accessories Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts. To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service. 3. Maintenance 86 Available consumables When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the followings of supplies for your machine:
Type Model Average yielda Average continuous black cartridge yield: Apporx. 2,500 standard pages (Black) Average continuous color cartridge yield: Apporx. 1,800 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan) Average continuous black cartridge yield: Apporx. 2,000 standard pages (Black) Average continuous color cartridge yield: Apporx. 1,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan) Average continuous black cartridge yield: Apporx. 6,000 standard pages (Black) Average continuous color cartridge yield: Apporx. 3,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan) Approx. 12,000 imagesb Toner cartridge Waste toner container CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series CLX-419xN Series CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND Series CLX-626xFD Series CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series Part name CLT-K504S: Black CLT-Y504S: Yellow CLT-M504S: Magenta CLT-C504S: Cyan CLT-K506S: Black CLT-Y506S: Yellow CLT-M506S: Magenta CLT-C506S: Cyan CLT-K506L: Black CLT-Y506L: Yellow CLT-M506L: Magenta CLT-C506L: Cyan CLT-W504 CLT-W506 a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size. 3. Maintenance 87 Available consumables b. Image counts based on one color on each page. If you print documents in full color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black), the life of this item will be reduced by 25%. Depending on the options, percentage of image area and job mode used, the toner cartridges lifespan may differ. When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific country conditions. Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machines warranty. 3. Maintenance 88 Available accessories You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machines performance and capacity. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7). Accessory Function Memory module Extends your machines memory capacity. Optional tray If you are experiencing frequent paper supply problems, you can attach an additional 500a sheet tray. Part name CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: ML-MEM370 (512 MB) CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: ML-MEM380 (1 GB) CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: CLP-S680A IEEE 1284 parallel Allows you to use various interface. CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: ML-PAR100 Connectorb When installing the printer driver with an IEEE1284 parallel connector, the machine might not be found and after installing the printer driver, only basic printing features are available. If you want to check the machine's status or set the settings, connect the machine to a computer with a USB cable or a network. If you use the IEEE 1284 parallel connector, you can not use the USB cable. a. Plain paper 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond). b. The optional IEEE 1284 paraller connector can be used by plugging in both the USB port and the 5V output port. 3. Maintenance 89 Available maintenance parts To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the machine. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its Average yield. Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The purpose of which is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met. CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series Average yielda Parts Transfer Roller Fuser Unit Pick-Up Roller Retard Roller Approx. 100,000 pages Approx. 50,000 pages Approx. 200,000 pages Approx. 100,000 pages Intermediate Transfer unit (ITB) Approx. 100,000 pages Approx. 100,000 pages Approx. 100,000 pages Approx. 300,000 pages Approx. 100,000 pages Approx. 100,000 pages a. It will be affected by the operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media, media size and job complexity. 3. Maintenance 90 Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to ensure optimal performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge. Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used. This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation if original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet. Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge properly. Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package. Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it were installed in the machine. Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Temperature greater than 40C (104F). Humidity range less than 20% or greater than 80%. An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature. Direct sunlight or room light. Dusty places. A car for a long period of time. An environment where corrosive gases are present.
-
An environment with salty air. Handling instructions Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge. Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock. Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage. 1 2 Toner cartridge usage Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges. Samsungs printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner cartridges. 3. Maintenance 91 Storing the toner cartridge 3 Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often. 3. Maintenance 92 Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density variation side to side. The Status LED blinks red. The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display. The computerss Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is low on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 330). If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary. Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 3. Maintenance 93 Redistributing toner 5~6 3. Maintenance 94 Replacing the toner cartridge For CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-419xFW Series:
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge. For CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series:
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge. The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K). The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicate when each individual toner cartridges should be replaced. The computerss Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is empty on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 330). Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 87). Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary. Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 3. Maintenance 95 Replacing the toner cartridge CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-419xFW Series 5~6 3. Maintenance 96 Replacing the toner cartridge CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series 5~6 3. Maintenance 97 Replacing the waste toner container When the life span of the waste toner container has expired, waste toner container-related message appears on the screen display of the control panel, indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced. Check the waste toner container for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 87). For information about installing the waste toner container, refer to the waste toner container installation guide included on the package. Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service representative when print quality problems occur. When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands. Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill. Do not tilt or turn over the container. 3. Maintenance 98 Installing accessories 4 Precautions 5 Setting Device Options Disconnect the power cord Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on. To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories. When you install the optional devices such as optional tray, memory, etc, this machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices in Device Options. Discharge static electricity The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again. When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a service component. Do not change it by yourself. There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose used batteries according to the instructions. 1 Click the Windows Start menu. 2 For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your machine. For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. 3 4 3. Maintenance 99 Installing accessories 5 6 If Printer properties item has mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. Select Device Options. The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating system you are using. Select the appropriate option. Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. if so, it is not applicable to your machine. Tray Options: Select the optional tray you installed. You can select the tray. Storage Options: Select the optional memory you installed. If this feature is checked, you can select the Print Mode. Printer Configuration: Select the printer language for the print job. Administrator Settings: You can select the Printer Status and EMF Spooling. Admin Job Accounting: Allows you to associate user and account identification information with each document you print.
- User permission: If you check this option, only users with user permission can start a print job.
- Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group permission can start a print job. If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job Accounting Password Encryption. Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in the control panel or SyncThru Web Service. Custom Paper Size Settings: You can specify custom paper size. 7 Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window. 3. Maintenance 100
1 | Users Manual 3 | Users Manual | 5.81 MiB |
Installing accessories 6 Upgrading a memory module Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory module slot to install additional memory. We recommend the use of only genuine Samsung DIMM's. You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM's. The order information is provided for optional accessories (see "Available accessories" on page 89). After installing the optional memory, you can use the advanced printing features, such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer properties window. You can controll the active job queue and file policy in Job Management menu (see "Using optional device features" on page 311). 1 2 2 1 3. Maintenance 101 Installing accessories 2 1 2 1 3. Maintenance 102 Monitoring the supplies life If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the corresponding parts, if necessary. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 36). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel. 1 Select 2 Select the option you want and press OK. Supplies Info.: Prints the supply information page. Total: Displays the total number of pages printed. ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages printed by using the document feeder. Platen Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned by using scanner glass. Transfer Belt: Displays the number of pages by using transfer belt. Fuser: Displays the number of pages by using fuser. Tray1 Roller: Displays the number of pages by using tray1 roller. Tray2 Rollera: Displays the number of pages by using tray2 roller. MP Tray Rollera: Displays the number of pages by using mp tray roller. 3 Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. a. CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Seriesonly. 3. Maintenance 103 Setting the toner low alert If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for whether or not this message or LED appears. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 36). You can set the machines settings by using the Device Settings in program. It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
- For Windows and Macintosh users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings, see "Device Settings" on page 329. 1 Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > TonerLow Alert on the control panel. Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Toner Status Alert on the touch screen. 2 3 Select the option you want. Press OK to save the selection. 3. Maintenance 104 Cleaning the machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing condition and use your machine longer. Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet. If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you. 7 Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine. 3. Maintenance 105 Cleaning the machine 8 Cleaning the inside During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems. To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary. Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine. Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). 3. Maintenance 106 Cleaning the machine 3. Maintenance 107 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the pickup roller Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). 9 3. Maintenance 108 Cleaning the machine 10 Cleaning the scan unit 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry. Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed. 4 3 1 2 Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see
"Front view" on page 22). 1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water. 2 Lift and open the scanner lid. 1 Scanner lid 2 Scanner glass 3 Document feeder glass 4 White bar 4 Close the scanner lid. 3. Maintenance 109 Tips for moving & storing your machine Tips for moving & storing your machine When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality. When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely. 3. Maintenance 110 3. Maintenance 111 4. Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing original document jams Clearing paper jams Understanding the status LED Understanding display messages 113 114 119 131 133 This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. If your machine has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the error. If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in the Advanced Guide (see "Troubleshooting" on page 336). If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service. Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media s, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 48). Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing. Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading. Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper. Do not mix papers in a tray. Use only recommended print media (see "Print media specifications" on page 143). 4. Troubleshooting 113 Clearing original document jams When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning message appears on the display. To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and carefully. To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or mixed paper- originals. 4. Troubleshooting 114 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam in front of scanner Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10). 1 4. Troubleshooting 115 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam inside of scanner Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10). 2 4. Troubleshooting 116 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam in exit area of scanner Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 22). 3 1 Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder. 2 Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder. 4. Troubleshooting 117 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam in scanner duplex path CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series only. This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 22). Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). 4 2 1 4. Troubleshooting 118 Clearing paper jams To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently. In tray1 Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). 5 4. Troubleshooting 119 Clearing paper jams In optional tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series only. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models (see "Available accessories" on page 89). 6 4. Troubleshooting 120 Clearing paper jams If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
4. Troubleshooting 121 Clearing paper jams 7 In the manual feeder/multi-purpose tray CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 4. Troubleshooting 122 Clearing paper jams When you print using the multi-purpose tray and the machine detects that there is either no paper or that the paper has been improperly loaded, follow the next steps to release the jammed paper. 4. Troubleshooting 123 Clearing paper jams If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
1 2 3 4. Troubleshooting 124
1 | Users Manual 4 | Users Manual | 5.56 MiB |
Clearing paper jams Inside the machine Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 22). 8 4. Troubleshooting 125 Clearing paper jams 9 In the exit area CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. 4. Troubleshooting 126 Clearing paper jams If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
4. Troubleshooting 127 Clearing paper jams CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. 4. Troubleshooting 128 Clearing paper jams If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
4. Troubleshooting 129 Clearing paper jams In the duplex unit area Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series only. 10 4. Troubleshooting 130 Understanding the status LED The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status. Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 26). To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part (see "Understanding display messages" on page 133). You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computerss Samsung Printing Status window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 330). If the problem persists, call a service representative. LED Status Off The machine is off-line. Description Green Blinking When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data. On The machine is on-line and can be used. Status Red A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. Blinking Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge lifea of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 93).b A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifea. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). On The cover is opened. Close the cover. There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray. The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display messages" on page 133). A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 119). 4. Troubleshooting 131 Understanding the status LED LED Status Description Blinking The machine is connecting to a wireless network. Wirelessb Blue
(
) Power Blue Eco Green On Off On Off On Off The machine is connected to a wireless network(see "Wireless network setup" on page 195). The machine is disconnected from a wireless network. The machine is in power save mode. The machine is in ready mode or machines power is off. Eco mode is on (see "Eco printing" on page 68). Eco mode is off. a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops printing. b. Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 26). 4. Troubleshooting 132 Understanding display messages Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machines status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary. 11 Paper Jam-related messages You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computerss Printing Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 330). If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job again. If the problem persists, call a service representative. When you call for service, provide the service representative with the contents of display message. Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the options or models.
[error number] indicates the error number.
[tray type] indicates the tray number.
[media type] indicates the media type.
[media size] indicates the media size.
[color] indicates the color of toner.
[unit type] indicates the unit type. Message Meaning Suggested solutions Original paper jam inside of scanner. Remove jam Original paper jam in front of scanner. Remove jam Paper Jam in Tray1 Paper Jam in Tray2 Paper Jam in MP Tray DADF Exit Jam DADF Duplex Jam The loaded original document has jammed in document feeder. Clear the jam (see "Clearing original document jams" on page 114). Paper has jammed in the tray. Clear the jam (see "In tray1" on page 119). Paper has jammed in the optional tray. Clear the jam (see "In optional tray" on page 120). Paper has jammed in the multi-purpose tray. Clear the jam (see "In the manual feeder/multi-purpose tray" on page 122). The loaded original document has jammed in the duplex document feeder. Clear the jam (see "Original paper jam in scanner duplex path" on page 118). 4. Troubleshooting 133 Understanding display messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Paper Jam bottom of duplex Jam inside machine Paper has jammed during duplex printing. This is applicable only to machines with this feature. Paper has jammed in the inside machine. Clear the jam (see "In the duplex unit area" on page 130). Clear the jam (see "Inside the machine" on page 125). Jam inside of duplex Paper has jammed in the inside duplex. Clear the jam (see "In the duplex unit area" on page 130). Jam in exit area Paper has jammed in the paper exit area. Clear the jam (see "In the exit area" on page 126). 12 Toner-related messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions A toner cartridge is not installed. Reinstall the toner cartridge. Error [error number]
Toner Failure: [error number] [color]
Install [color] toner again
[color] toner not installed Install [color] toner cartridge A toner cartridge is not being detected Not remove protective film from toner. Reinstall the toner cartridge two or three times to confirm it is seated properly. If the problem persists, contact the service representatives. Remove the protective film from the toner cartridge. Refer to Quick Installation Guide provided with your machine. Install the corresponding toner cartridge with a Samsung-genuine cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). 4. Troubleshooting 134
[color]Toner Not compatible
[color] toner cartridge is not compatible. Check guide The indicated toner cartridge is not suitable for your machine. Understanding display messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Message Meaning Suggested solutions Prepare new [color]
toner Prepare new [color]
toner cartridge Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge. The estimated cartridge life of toner is close. Replace new toner Replace with new
[color] toner cartridge The indicated toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifea. Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner
(see "Redistributing toner"
on page 93). You can choose Stop or Continue as shown on the control panel. If you select Stop, the printer stops printing. If you select Continue, the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be guaranteed. Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears. Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). End of life, Replace with new [color] toner cartridge The indicated toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge lifea. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798
(see "Available consumables" on page 87). The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media, percentage of image area, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when replace new cartridge appears and the machine stops printing. 13 Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. Tray-related messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Output bin full Output bin full. Remove printed paper The output tray is full. Remove papers from the output tray, the printer resumes printing. 4. Troubleshooting 135 Understanding display messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions 14 Paper jam or empty in tray Paper has jammed in the paper feed area. There is no paper in tray. Paper Empty in tray 1 Paper is empty in tray 1. Load paper Paper Empty in tray 2 Paper is empty in tray 2. Load paper Paper Empty in MP Paper is empty in MP tray. Load paper There is no paper in tray 1. There is no paper in tray 2. There is no paper in the multi-purpose tray. Clear the jam (see
"CLX-419xN/CLX-
419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series" on page 122
). Load paper in tray
(see "Multi-purpose
(or Manual feeder ) tray" on page 52). Load paper in tray 1 (see
"Tray 1 / optional tray"
on page 49). Load paper in tray 2 (see
"Tray 1 / optional tray"
on page 49). Load paper in the multi-
purpose tray (see "Multi-
purpose (or Manual feeder ) tray" on page 52). Network-related messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions IP Conflict This IP address conflicts with that of other system 802.1x Network Error 802.1x Network Error Contact the Admin. The network IP address you have set is being used by someone else. Fail to authenticate. Wireless Network Error Wireless module is not installed. There is a problem with the network. BOOTP problem BOOTP has a problem. Switching to Auto IP DHCP problem DHCP has a problem. Switching to Auto IP Check the IP address and reset it if necessary (see Advanced Guide). Check the network authentication protocol. If the problem persists, contact your network administrator. Reboot the power and try the printing job again. If the problem persists, please call for service. Change the Auto IP 4. Troubleshooting 136 Understanding display messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Message Meaning Suggested solutions The IP address assignment is failed. This happens, when Auto IP for BOOTP/DHCP is set in SyncThru Web Service. Change the IP address assignment method to DHCP/BOOTP or Static. If you do not change this option, the BOOTP/DHCP server continually asks to assign the IP Address. BOOTP problem BOOTP has a problem. ReconfigureDHCP/
static IP DHCP problem DHCP has a problem. ReconfigureBOOTP/
static IP 15 Misc. messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Adjusting Color Registration Calibrating image density Door is open. Close it The machine is adjusting the color registration. Wait a few minutes. The machine is calibrating the image density. The front cover or rear cover is not securely latched. Wait a few minutes. Close the cover until it locks into place. Scanner door open Door of scanner is open. Close the door Error [error number]
Actuator [unit type]
Failure: [error number]
Call for service
[unit type]Failure: [error number]Call for service if the problem persists Error [error number]
[unit type] Failure: [error number] Turn off then on Error [error number]
[unit type] Unit Failure:
[error number] Turn off then on
[unit type] Unit Failure:
[error number] Please turn off then on Not Proper room temp Not Proper room temperature. Change room temperature The document feeder cover is not securely latched. Close the cover until it locks into place. The machine unit cannot be controlled. Reboot the power and try the printing job again. If the problem persists, please call for service. The machine is in a room with improper room temperature. Move the machine to a room with proper room temperature (see
"Specifications" on page 141). 4. Troubleshooting 137 Understanding display messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Message Meaning Suggested solutions Prepare TR. belt Prepare new image transfer belt unit The life of the transfer belt will expired soon. Replace TR. belt Replace with new image transfer belt uint The life of the transfer belt has expired. Replace Fuser uint Replace with new fuser uint The life of the fuser unit will be expired. Replace the transfer belt with a new one. Contact the service representatives. Replace the transfer belt with a new one. Contact the service representatives. Replace the fuser unit with a new one. If the problem persists, please call for service. Install TR. belt unit Install image transfer belt unit TR Not compatible Image transfer belt unit is not compatible. Check guide The transfer belt is not installed. Install a Samsung-
genuine transfer belt. The transfer belt of the machine is not for your machine. Install the a Samsung-
genuine part designed for your machine. The life span of the waste toner container has expired and the printer will stop printing until a new waste toner container is placed into the printer. The waste toner container is not installed. Waste toner Full Waste toner container is almost full. Replace with new one Waste Not instelled Waste toner tank is not instelled. install it Waste toner container is not instelled. install the container Replace pickup roller Replace with new [tray type] pickup roller The life of the tray1, tray2 or MP tray pick-up roller will expired soon. Replace retard roller End of life, Replace with new [tray type] retard roller The life of the tray1 or tray2 retard roller has expired. Replace a waste toner container with a Samsung-genuine waste toner container. Install the waste toner container. If it is already installed, try to reinstall the waste toner container. If the problem persists, call for service. Replace the tray pick-
up roller with a new one. Contact the service representatives. Replace the tray retard roller with a new one. Contact the service representatives. 4. Troubleshooting 138 Understanding display messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Memory Full Fax memory is almost full. Print or remove received fax job There is no more available fax memory. No more fax data can be received. Delete the received fax data in the memory. Call for service to delete fax memory. Memory Full The memory is full. Fax memory is full. Print or remove received fax job Scanner Locked The scanner is locked. Scanner is locked. Press Stop button Error [error number]
Fax System Failure:
[error number] Install fax modem card again Error [error number]
UI System Failure:
[error number] Call for service Error [error number]
EngineSystem Failure:
[error number] Call for service There is a problem in the fax system. There is a problem in the UI system. There is a problem in the engine system. Print or remove the received fax data in the memory. Reboot the power. If the problem persists, please call for service. Install the fax card. If it is already installed, try to reinstall the fax card. If the problem persists, call for service. Unplug the power cord and plug it back in. If the problem persists, call for service. Unplug the power cord and plug it back in. If the problem persists, call for service. 4. Troubleshooting 139 5. Appendix This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations. Specifications Regulatory information Copyright 141 153 165 Specifications 1 General specifications The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information. Dimension Items Width x Length x Height Weight Machine with consumables Description CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: 424 x 453 x 457 mm (16.69 x 17.83 x 17.99 inches) CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series: 424 x 453 x 457 mm (16.69 x 17.83 x 17.99 inches) CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: 469 x 453 x 490 mm (18.46 x 17.83 x 19.29 inches) CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: 24 Kg (52.91 Ibs) CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series: 24.00 Kg (52.91Ibs) CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: 24.00 Kg (52.91Ibs) 5. Appendix 141 Specifications Noise Levela Items Ready mode Print mode Copy mode Scanner glass Document feeder Scan mode Scanner glass Document feeder Temperature Humidity Power ratingb Operation Storage (packed) Operation Storage (packed) 110 volt models 220 volt models Power consumption Average operating mode Ready mode Power save mode Power off mode Wirelessc Module Description Less than 37 dB (A) CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 50 dB (A) CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A) CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A) CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 54 dB (A) CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A) CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series: Less than 54 dB (A) CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 54 dB (A) CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A) CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 54 dB (A) CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW Series: Less than 52 dB (A) CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD Series: Less than 54 dB (A) CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW Series: Less than 54 dB (A) 15 to 30 C (59 to 86 F)
-20 to 50 C (-4 to 122 F) 20 to 80% RH 10 to 90% RH AC 110 - 127 V AC 220 - 240 V Less than 850 W Less than 12 W Less than 1.0 W Less than 0.1 W SPW-B4319U 5. Appendix 142 Specifications a. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing. b. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine. c. Wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 7). 2 Print media specifications Type Size Dimensions Plain paper b 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches) 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches) 216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches) 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches) 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches) 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) Letter Legal US Folio A4 Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive Statement A5 A6 Weight/Capacitya CLP-41xN Series CLP-41xNW Series Tray1 70 to 89 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/
m2 (21 lbs bond) Manual feeder 70 to 89 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 1 sheet 70 to 89 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 150 sheets of 80 g/
m2 (21 lbs bond) CLP-68xND Series CLP-68xDW Series Multi-purpose tray 70 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 50 sheets Tray1/ Optional tray 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) Tray1: 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 (21 lbs bond) Optional tray: 500 sheets of 80 g/m2
(20 lbs bond) 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 150 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs bond) Not available in optional tray. 5. Appendix 143 Specifications Type Size Dimensions Envelope Thick paper b Envelope Monarch Envelope No. 10 Envelope No. 9 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C6 Refer to the Plain paper section 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches) 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches) 98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches) 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches) 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches) Refer to the Plain paper section Thicker paper b Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Weight/Capacitya CLP-41xN Series CLP-41xNW Series Tray1 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 20 sheets Manual feeder 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 1 sheet CLP-68xND Series CLP-68xDW Series Tray1/ Optional tray 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 20 sheets Not available in optional tray. Multi-purpose tray 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 5 sheets 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond) 50 sheets of 105 g/
90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond) 1 sheet 91 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond) 50 sheets of 105 g/m2
(28 lbs bond) 91 to 105 g/m2 (24to 28 lbs bond) 10 sheets 164 to 220 g/m2 (43 to 59 lbs bond) 1 sheet 164 to 220 g/m2 (43 to 59 lbs bond) 50 sheets of 220 g/m2 164 to 220 g/m2 (43 to 59 lbs bond) 10 sheets) m2 (28 lbs bond) 164 to 220 g/m2 (43 to 59 lbs bond) 50 sheets of 220 g/
m2 (59 lbs bond)
(59 lbs bond) Not available in optional tray. 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) 250sheets of 70 g/m2
(19 lbs bond) 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) 50 sheets 5. Appendix 144 Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 69 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) 250 sheets of 70 g/
m2 (19 lbs bond) 60 to 69 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) 1 sheet Specifications Type Size Dimensions Cotton, Color, Pre-printed Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Weight/Capacitya CLP-41xN Series CLP-41xNW Series CLP-68xND Series CLP-68xDW Series Tray1 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/
m2 (21 lbs bond) Manual feeder Tray1/ Optional tray 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 1 sheet 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 Multi-purpose tray 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 50 sheets Recycled Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Transparency Letter, Legal, A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/
m2 (21 lbs bond) 138 to 146 g/m2 (35 to 39 lbs bond) 50 sheets 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 1 sheet 138 to 146 g/m2 (35 to 39 lbs bond) 1 sheet Labels c Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) 50 sheets 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) 1 sheet
(21 lbs bond) Not available in optional tray. 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs bond) 138 to 146 g/m2 (35 to 39 lbs bond) 50 sheets Not available in optional tray. 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) 50 sheets Not available in optional tray. 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 50 sheets 138 to 146 g/m2 (35 to 39 lbs bond) 10 sheets 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) 10 sheets 5. Appendix 145 Specifications Type Size Dimensions Refer to the Plain paper section Card stock b Bond paper Archive, Punched paper, Letterhead Glossy Photo b Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Letter, A4, Postcard 4x6 Weight/Capacitya CLP-41xN Series CLP-41xNW Series CLP-68xND Series CLP-68xDW Series Tray1 121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to 43 lbs bond) 50 sheets Manual feeder 121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to 43 lbs bond) 1 sheet Tray1/ Optional tray 121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to 43 lbs bond) 50 sheets Multi-purpose tray 121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to 43 lbs bond) 10 sheets Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond) 50 sheets 250 sheets 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond) 1 sheet 1 sheet 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond) 50 sheets 250 sheets 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond) 10 sheets 50 sheets Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to 35 lbs bond) 30 sheets 111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to 35 lbs bond) 1 sheet 131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to 47 lbs bond) 30 sheets 131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to 47 lbs bond) 1 sheet 176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59 lbs bond) 30 sheets 176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59 lbs bond) 1 sheet 111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to 35 lbs bond) for tray1 Tray1: 30 sheets Optional tray: 50 sheets 131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to 47 lbs bond) Optional tray: 50 sheets 176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59 lbs bond) Optional tray: 50 sheets Tray1: 30 sheets Tray1: 30 sheets 111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to 35 lbs bond) 5 sheets 131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to 47 lbs bond) 5 sheets 176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59 lbs bond) 5 sheets 5. Appendix 146 Specifications Type Size Dimensions Minimum size (custom) Tray1: 98 x 127 mm (3.86 x 5 inches) Optional tray: 148.5 x 210 mm
(5.85 x 8.27inches) Multi-Purpose tray/ Manual Feeder: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) Maximum size (custom) Weight/Capacitya CLP-41xN Series CLP-41xNW Series CLP-68xND Series CLP-68xDW Series Tray1 Manual feeder 60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16 to 59 lb bond) 60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16 to 59 lb bond) Tray1/ Optional tray 60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16 to 59 lb bond) for tray1 Multi-purpose tray 60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16 to 59 lb bond) 60 to 163 g/m2 ( 16 to 43 lb bond) for optional tray. a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions. b. Post card 4 x 6 is supported for tray1Manual feeder, or Multi-purpose tray. c. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness. 3 System requirements Microsoft Windows Operating system Requirement (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Windows 2000 Windows XP Intel Pentium II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 128 MB (256 MB) 600 MB 1.5 GB 5. Appendix 147 Specifications Operating system Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Requirement (recommended) CPU Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme). DVD-R/W Drive Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) RAM free HDD space 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB 512 MB (2 GB) 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB (2 GB) 10 GB 15 GB 16 GB 512 MB (2 GB) 10 GB Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems. Users who have administrator rights can install the software. Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine. For Windows 2000, Services Pack 4 or higher is required. 5. Appendix 148 Specifications Macintosh Operating system Mac OS X 10.4 Mac OS X 10.5 Mac OS X 10.6 Mac OS X 10.7 Requirements (Recommended) CPU RAM Free HDD space Intel processors PowerPC G4/G5 Intel processors 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5 Intel processors Intel processors 128 MB for a powerPC based Mac (512 MB) 512 MB for an Intel-based Mac (1 GB) 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB (2 GB) 2 GB 1 GB 1 GB 1 GB 4 GB 5. Appendix 149 Specifications Linux Items Operating system Requirements Redhat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit) Fedora 5 ~ 13 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux 10.1 (32 bit) OpenSuSE 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64 bit) Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit) Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit) Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit) CPU RAM Free HDD space Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core2) 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB (2 GB) Unix Items Operating system Requirements Sun Solaris 9, 10 (x86, SPARC) HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium) IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 5. Appendix 150 Specifications Items Requirements Free HDD space Up to 100 MB 5. Appendix 151 Specifications Network environment Network and wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 7). 4 You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine. Items Network interface Network operating system Network protocols Wireless security Specifications Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2 Various Linux OS Mac OS X 10.4 ~10.7 UNIX OS TCP/IPv4 DHCP, BOOTP DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec) Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK) Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES 5. Appendix 152 Regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements. When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
5 Laser safety statement The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-
1 : 2007. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition. Warning Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. 6 Ozone safety This products ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good ventilation. 5. Appendix 153 Regulatory information Mercury Safety Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only) 7 8 Power saver 9 10 This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use. When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
www.energystar.gov For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be on your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified. Recycling Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner. China only 5. Appendix 154 Regulatory information 11 Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
(Applicable in the european union and other european countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
(The United States of America only) Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799 Taiwan only 12 13 Radio frequency emissions FCC information to the user This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 5. Appendix 155 Regulatory information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Canadian radio interference regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada. Cet appareil numrique respecte les limites de bruits radiolectriques applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matriel brouilleur: Appareils Numriques, ICES-003 dicte par lIndustrie et Sciences Canada. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help. Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 14 United States of America Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label. 5. Appendix 156 Regulatory information The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna. 15 Russia only 5. Appendix 157 Regulatory information 16 17 18 Germany only Turkey only Canada only This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables dIndustrie Canada. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / Lindice dequivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme dindices dequivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs nexcede pas cinq. 19 Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information:
1 2 the date and time of transmission identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual. 3 5. Appendix 158 Regulatory information The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service 20 Ringer Equivalence Number The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that they:
a promptly notify the customer. b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem. c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68. You should also know that:
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system. If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your machine. 5. Appendix 159 Regulatory information If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores. The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug. When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number. This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines. This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids. If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away. You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket. You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C. Important warning:
21 Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only) Important You must earth this machine. The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
Green and Yellow: Earth Blue: Neutral Brown: Live The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover. Contact the people from you purchased the machine. If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green. You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black. 5. Appendix 160 Regulatory information You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red. You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board. March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative. 22 Declaration of conformity (European countries) EC Certification Approvals and Certifications Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-419xN Series] is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/
108/EC). Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-419xFN Series/
CLX-419xFW Series/CLX-626xND Series/CLX-626xFD Series/CLX-
626xFR Series/CLX-626xFW Series] is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/
EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC. January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment. January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility. Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX) This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance. The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document. 5. Appendix 161 Regulatory information European radio approval information (for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices) No limitations at this time Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label. Israel only 23 24 Regulatory compliance statements The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R&TTE directive. Wireless guidance European states qualified under wireless approvals:
EU countries European states with restrictions on use:
EU In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2454-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless EEA/EFTA countries Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device. Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed. 5. Appendix 162 Regulatory information The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation. As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication. In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device. Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country. If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information. 5. Appendix 163 Regulatory information 25 China only 5. Appendix 164 Copyright 2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This users guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this users guide. Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Google, Picasa, and Google Docs are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc. iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, TrueType, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc. True, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information. REV. 0.98 5. Appendix 165 Users Guide Users Guide CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN Series CLX-419xFW Series CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR Series CLX-626xFW Series ADVANCED ADVANCED This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments. Some features may not be available depending on models or countries. BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting on windows. ADVANCED 1. Software Installation Installation for Macintosh Reinstallation for Macintosh Installation for Linux Reinstallation for Linux 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine Useful network programs Wired network setup Installing driver over the network IPv6 configuration Wireless network setup Samsung MobilePrint AirPrint 3. Useful Setting Menus Before you begin reading a chapter Print 174 175 176 177 179 180 183 192 195 229 230 233 234 Copy Fax Scan System setup Admin setup Custom setup Eco Direct USB 4. Special Features Altitude adjustment Storing email address Entering various characters Setting up the fax address book Registering authorized users Printing features Scan features Fax features Using shared folder features Using optional device features 235 241 245 248 260 261 262 263 266 267 269 270 273 274 290 300 311 312 171 ADVANCED 5. Useful Management Tools 315 Easy Capture Manager 316 Samsung Easy Color Manager 317 Samsung AnyWeb Print 318 Easy Eco Driver 319 Using SyncThru Web Service 322 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 327 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 330 Using Samsung Printer Status Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator 332 6. Troubleshooting Paper feeding problems Power and cable connecting problems Printing problems Printing quality problems Copying problems Scanning problems Faxing problems Operating system problems 337 338 339 343 351 352 354 356 172 1. Software Installation This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network connected machines driver (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 183). Installation for Macintosh Reinstallation for Macintosh Reinstallation for Linux Installation for Linux 174 175 176 177 If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machines driver (see
"Installing the driver locally" on page 32). Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches). Installation for Macintosh 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 2 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. 5 Click Continue. 6 7 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 8 When the message that warns that all applications will close on your Read the license agreement and click Continue. computer appears, click Continue. 9 Click Continue on the User Options Pane. 10 Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install. 11 Enter the password and click OK. 12 Installing software requires you to restart your computer. Click Continue Installation. 13 After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart. 14 Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.7, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 15 Click Add on the Printer List. For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.7, click the + folder icon; a display window will pop up. 16 Click Default Browser and find the USB connection. For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click Default and find the USB connection. 17 For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model. For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 18 Click Add. To install the fax driver:
a Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Fax Queue Creator. b Your machine appears on the Printer List c Select machine to use and click Create button 1. Software Installation 174 Reinstallation for Macintosh If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 2 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Uninstaller OS X icon. 5 6 When the uninstall is done, click OK. Enter the password and click OK. If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility or Print & Fax. 1. Software Installation 175 Installation for Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads). 1 Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 When the Administrator Login window appears, type root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3 From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer. Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package. 4 5 Double click cdroot > autorun. 6 When the welcome screen appears, click Next. 7 When the installation is complete, click Finish. The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on-screen help that is available through your system menu or from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager. 1. Software Installation 176 Reinstallation for Linux If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 When the Administrator Login window appears, type root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3 Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following.
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh 4 Click Uninstall. 5 Click Next. 6 Click Finish. 1. Software Installation 177 2. Using a Network-
Connected Machine This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software. Installing driver over the network IPv6 configuration Useful network programs Wired network setup Wireless network setup Samsung MobilePrint AirPrint 179 180 183 192 195 229 230 Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by models" on page 7). Useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing several machines on the network is possible. 2 SyncThru Web Admin Service Before using the programs below, set the IP address first. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7). 1 Web-based machine management solution for network administrators. SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access. Download this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com. 3 SyncThru Web Service SetIP wired network setup The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the following tasks (see "Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 319). This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. Check the supplies information and status. Customize machine settings. Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain person's email automatically. Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments. See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)" on page 180. See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Macintosh)" on page 181. See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)" on page 182. The machine that does not support the network port, it will not be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 24). TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 179 Wired network setup 4 Printing a network configuration report First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. You can print Network Configuration Report from the machines control panel that will show the current machines network settings. This will help you to set up a network. IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows) The machine has the display screen: Press the control panel and select Network >Network Configuration.
(Menu) button on the Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall. The machine has the touch screen: Press Setup from the Main screen >
Machine Setup> Network Setup > Next > Network Configuration. 1 Install this program from the supplied CD-ROM by double-click Application > SetIP > Setup.exe. Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machines MAC address and IP address. For example:
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78 IP Address: 169.254.192.192 Setting IP address The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 24). TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. 5 Follow the instructions in the installation window. 2 3 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 4 5 From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. Turn on the machine. 6 Click the IP configuration window. icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 180 Wired network setup 7 Enter the machines new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. Find the machines MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 180) and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. 8 Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Macintosh) Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System Preferences > Security > Firewall. The following instructions may vary from your model. 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2 Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html. 3 Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows the printers name and IP address information. 4 Click the IP configuration window. icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
5 Enter the machines new information into the configuration window. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 181 Wired network setup Find the machines MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 180) and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. 6 7 Quit Safari. IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux) Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System Preferences or Administrator. The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems. 1 Open /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/. 2 Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file. 3 Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 4 Enter the machines new information into the configuration window. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. Find the machines MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 180) and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. 5 The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 182 Installing driver over the network 6 Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7). The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 24). Selecting Custom Installation allows you to choose which programs to install. When the installation window appears, select Custom Installation. You can select the XPS/PS printer driver or other software applications in the Select Software window. Windows 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. Also, your machines IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP address" on page 180). If the Found New Hardware Wizard appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel to close the window. 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3 Select Install Now. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machines connection and choose individual components to install. Follow the instructions on the window. 4 Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. The program searches for the machine. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 183 Installing driver over the network 5 6 If your machine is not found on the network or locally, an error message appears. Select the option you want and click Next. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you wish to use and click OK. If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window appears. Follow the instructions in the installation window. Silent installation Mode Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation by typing /s or /S in the command window. Command-line Parameters Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window. Following command-line are effective and operated when command is used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be operated solely. Command- line Definition Description
/s or
/S
/p<port name> or
/P<port name>
Starts silent installation. Specifies printer port. Network Port will be created by use of Standard TCP/IP Port monitor. For local port, this port must exist on system before being specified by command. Installs machine drivers without prompting any UIs or user intervention. Printer port name can be specified as IP address, hostname, USB local port name or IEEE1284 port name. For example:
/pxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx in where, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx means IP address for network printer. /
pUSB001, /PLPT1:, /
phostname 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 184 Installing driver over the network Command- line Definition Description Command- line Definition Description
/a<dest_path> or
/A<dest_path>
Specifies destination path for installation. The destination path should be a fully qualified path.
/i<script filename>
or
/I<script filename>
Specifies customized install script file for custom operation. The script filename should be a fully qualified filename.
/n<Printer name>
or
/N<Printer name>
/nd or
/ND Specifies printer name. Printer instance shall be created as specified printer name. Commands not to set the installed driver as a default machine driver. Since machine drivers should be installed on the OS specific location, this command applies to only application software. Customized script file can be assigned for customized silent installation. This script file can be created or modified through provided installer customizing utility or by text editor.
/x or
/X This customized script file is prior than default installer setting in setup package but not prior than command-line parameters. Uses existing machine driver files to create printer instance if it is already installed. With this parameter, you can add printer instances as your wishes. It indicates installed machine driver will not be the default machine driver on your system if there are one or more printer drivers installed. If there is no installed machine driver on your system, then this option wont be applied because Windows OS will set installed printer driver as a default machine driver. This command provides a way to install a printer instance that uses installed printer driver files without installing an additional driver. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 185 Installing driver over the network Command- line Definition Description Command- line Definition Description
/up<printer name> or
/UP<printer name>
Removes only specified printer instance and not the driver files.
/d or
/D Uninstalls all device drivers and applications from your system.
/v<share name> or
/V<share name>
Shares installed machine and add other available platform drivers for Point &
Print.
/o or
/O Opens Printers and Faxes folder after installation.
/f<log filename>
or
/F<log filename>
Specifies log filename. The default log file is created in the system temp folder if not specified. This command provides a way to remove only specified printer instance from your system without effecting other printer drivers. It will not remove printer driver files from your system. This command will remove all installed device drivers and application software from your system. It will install all supported Windows OS platforms machine drivers to system and share it with specified
<share name> for point and print. This command will open Printers and Faxes folder after the silent installation. It will create a log file to a specified folder.
/h, /H or /?
Shows Command-line Usage. 7 Macintosh 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 2 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. 5 6 7 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 8 When the message which warns that all applications will close on your Read the license agreement and click Continue. Click Continue. computer appears, click Continue. 9 Click Continue on the User Options Pane. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 186 Installing driver over the network If you have not set the IP address yet, click Set IP address and refer to "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Macintosh)" on page 181. If you want to set the wireless setting, refer to "Setup using Macintosh" on page 211. 10 Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install. 11 Enter the password and click OK. 12 Installing software requires you to restart your computer. Click Continue Installation. 13 After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart. 14 Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 15 Click Add on the Printer List. For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click the + icon. A display window will pop up. 16 For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer. For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click IP. 17 Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol. When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option. 18 Enter the machines IP address in the Address input field. 19 Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue first. 20 For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model. For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, if Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using. 21 Click Add. Your machine appears in the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. To install the fax driver:
a Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Fax Queue Creator. b Your machine appears on the Printer List. c Select machine to use and Click Create button. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 187 Installing driver over the network 8 Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads). Install the Linux driver and add network printer 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machines IP address should have been set. The Samsung installer window opens. Click Continue. Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new directory. 2 Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website. 3 4 Double-click the Linux folder > install.sh icon. 5 6 7 8 9 The machines IP address and model name appears on list field. The add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. Select network printer and click Search button. Select your machine and click Next. 10 Input the printer description and Next. 11 After the machine is added, click Finish. 12 When installation is done, click Finish. Add a network printer Select Network printer and click the Search button. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 1 Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator. 2 Click Add Printer. 3 4 5 6 7 8 After the machine is added, click Finish. Enter the printer description and click Next. Select your machine and click Next. The printers IP address and model name appears on list field. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 188 Installing driver over the network UNIX Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before installing the UNIX printer driver (see "Operating System" on page 7). The commands are marked with , when typing the commands, do not type . Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Operating System" on page 7). 9 To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver package from the Samsung website ((http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). Installing the UNIX printer driver package The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned. 1 From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer Driver package to your computer. 2 Acquire root privileges. su -
3 Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer. See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details. 4 Unpack the UNIX printer driver package. For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands. gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -
5 Go to the unpacked directory. 6 Run the install script. /install i install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the UNIX Printer Driver package. Use chmod 755 install command to give the permission to the installer script. Execute the . /install c command to verify installation results. Run installprinter from the command line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to the following procedures. 7 8 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 189 Installing driver over the network On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two commands on the root terminal:
accept <printer_name>
enable <printer_name>
Uninstalling the printer driver package The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system. a Run uninstallprinter command from the terminal. It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard. The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list. b Select the printer to be deleted. c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system. d Execute the . /install d command to uninstall the whole package. e To verify removal results, execute the . /install c command. To re-install it, use the command . /install i to reinstall the binaries. Setting up the printer To add the printer to your UNIX system, run installprinter from the command line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window according to the following steps:
1 Type the name of the printer. 2 3 Select the appropriate printer model from the model list. Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the Type field. This is optional. 4 5 6 Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional. Specify the printer location in the Location field. Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type, only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed. 7 Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris OS. Select Copies to set the number of copies. 8 9 Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted. 10 Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 190 Installing driver over the network 11 Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default. 12 Click OK to add the printer. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 191 IPv6 configuration IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher. 7 The Add Printer Wizard window appears. Follow the instructions in the window. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7 or "Menu overview" on page 36). If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting. If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by. Activating IPv6 In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address. 10 From the control panel Turn on the machine. 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2 3 Print a Network Configuration Report that will check IPv6 addresses
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 180). 1 Press the 2 3 4 5
(Menu) button on the control panel. Press Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Activate. Select On and press OK. Turn the machine off and turn it on again. Reinstall your printer driver. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes. 4 5 Click Add a printer in the left pane of the Printers and Faxes windows. 6 Click Add a local printer in the Add Printer windows. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 192 IPv6 configuration Setting IPv6 addresses The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements. Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with FE80). Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router. Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server. Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user. 11 From the SyncThru Web Service For models that do not have the display screen on the control panel, you need to access SyncThru Web Service first using the IPv4 address and follow the below procedure to use IPv6. 1 Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. DHCPv6 address configuration (Stateful) If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following options for default dynamic host configuration. 2 If its your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service you need to log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and password. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. 1 Press the 2 3
(Menu) button on the control panel. Press Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config. Press OK to select the required value you want. DHCPv6 Addr.: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request. DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request. Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router. ID: admin Password: sec00000 3 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens, move the mouse cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network Settings. 4 Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website. 5 Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 193 IPv6 configuration 6 Check the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text box is activated. 7 Enter the rest of the address (e.g.,:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. A is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F). 8 Choose the DHCPv6 configuration. 9 Click the Apply button. Using SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network Configuration Report (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 180). Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]). Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets. 2 3 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 194 Wireless network setup Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless networking may not be available depending on the model (see "Features by models" on page 7). If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network settings to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting. Wireless network name and network key Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up, a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Key are created for the network. Ask your network administrator about this information before proceeding with the machine installation. 12 Getting started Understanding your network type Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a time. Infrastructure mode This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to communicate with the wireless machine. Ad hoc mode This mode does not use an access point. The wireless computer and wireless machine communicate directly. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 195 Wireless network setup 13 Introducing wireless set up methods You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting method from the below table. Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country. Set up method Connecting method Description & Reference From the machines control panel Using the WPS (recommended)
(
) See "Machines with a display screen" on page 199. See "Machines without a display screen" on page 200. Using the menu button See "Using the menu button" on page 201.
(
) 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 196 Wireless network setup Set up method Connecting method Description & Reference Access point via USB cable (recommended)
(
) Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 202. Macintosh user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 211. From the computer Access point via WPS button (without a USB cable connection) Windows user, see "Access point via WPS button (without a USB cable connection)"
on page 206.
(
,
) Ad hoc via USB cable
(
) Macintosh user, see "Setting the access point using the WPS button" on page 215. Windows user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 208. Macintosh user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 217. Using a network cable See "Using a network cable" on page 219. Other set up methods Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing See "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 223. If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless network" on page 225). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 197 Wireless network setup 14 Using the WPS button If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the
(WPS) button on the control panel without a computer. If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode, make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine. Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to connect to the access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide of the access point (or wireless router) you are using. When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings may change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless security settings. The option name may differ depending on the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Items to prepare Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS). Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS). Networked computer (PIN mode only) Choosing your type There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network using the
(WPS) button on the control panel. The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively.
(WPS) button on the The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-
Fi Protected Setup WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router). Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a typical wireless network environment. You can change the WPS mode in control panel (
Wireless > OK > WPS Setting).
(Menu) > Network> 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 198 Wireless network setup Machines with a display screen Connecting in PIN mode Connecting in PBC mode 1 Press and hold the 2 seconds.
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than 1 Press and hold the 2 seconds.
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than 2 The eight-digit PIN appears on the display. The machine starts waiting for up to two minutes until you press the WPS
(PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). 2 Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. c AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process, the APs SSID information appears on the display. You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router). The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network. b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. c SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection process, the APs SSID information is displayed on the LCD display. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 199 Wireless network setup Machines without a display screen Connecting in PBC mode 1 Press and hold the seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.
(WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4 The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the access point (or wireless router). 2 Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. 3 You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router). The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-
digit PIN. The WPS LED blinks in the order below:
a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. Re-connecting to a network When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless connection settings and address. Connecting in PIN mode 1 The network configuration report, including PIN, must be printed (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 180).
(Stop/Clear) button on the In ready mode, press and hold the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machines PIN. 2 Press and hold the 4 seconds until the status LED stays on.
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router). In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the wireless network:
The machine is turned off and on again. The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 200 Wireless network setup Canceling the connection process To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to the wireless network, press and release the panel. You need to wait 2 minutes to re-connect to the wireless network.
(Stop/Clear) on the control Disconnecting from a network To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the the control panel for more than two seconds.
(WPS) button on When the Wi-Fi network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off. When the Wi-Fi network is being used: While the machine waits until the current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the WPS LED. Then, the wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS LED turns off. Using the menu button Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 15 Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network. After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 183). 1 Press the 2 3
(Menu) button on the control panel. Press Network > Wireless > WLAN Settings. Press the OK to select the setup method you want. Wizard (recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic. The machine will display a list of available networks from which to choose. After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the corresponding security key. Custom: In this mode, users can give or edit manually their own SSID
, or choose the security option in detail. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 201 Wireless network setup Setup using Windows Shortcut to the Wireless Setting program without the CD: If you have installed the printer driver once, you can access the Wireless Setting program without the CD. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Wireless Setting Program. 16 Access point via USB cable Items to prepare Access point Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable Creating the infrastructure network 1 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2 Turn on your computer, access point, and machine. 3 4 5 6 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. The software searches the wireless network. If the software has failed to search the network, check if the USB cable is connected properly between the computer and machine, and follow the instructions in the window. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 202 Wireless network setup If wireless network set up has been set before, the Wireless Network Setting Information window appears. If you want to reset the wireless settings, check the check box and click Next. For models that support the WPS button (without a USB cable connection), the window shown below will appear. 7 Select the method to use from the wireless set up method window.
- With a USB Cable: Connect the USB cable and click Next, then go to step 7.
- Using the WPS button: See "Access point via WPS button (without a USB cable connection)" on page 206. Configure the wireless settings manually.: Go to step 8. Configure the wireless settings by pressing the WPS button on the access point.: Connect to the wireless network by press the WPS button on the access point (or wireless router).
-
Follow the instructions in the window. When you are done configuring the wireless network settings, go to step 11. 8 After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you are using and click Next. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 203 Wireless network setup If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting. Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive). Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES). Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security settings. The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ according to its security mode: WEP or WPA. WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for authentication and enter the WEP security key. Click Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click Next. WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 204 Wireless network setup 9 The window shows the wireless network settings and checks if the settings are correct. Click Next. 10 When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next. For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP. For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computers network configuration information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For example, If the computers network information is as shown below,
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
-
Then, the machines network information should be as follows:
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computers subnet mask.) Gateway: 169.254.133.1 If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the machine when configuring the wireless network. 11 Wireless network setting is completed. To print from a Wi-Fi Direct supported mobile device, set the Wi-Fi Direct Option (see "Setting up Wi-
Fi Direct" on page 223). Wi-Fi Direct Option:
Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports this feature. Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 223). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 205 Wireless network setup Network Name(SSID): The default Network Name is the model name and the maximum length is 22 characters (not including "Direct-xx-"). Network Key is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters. Access point via WPS button (without a USB cable connection) 12 When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click Next. 13 Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears. 14 Select the components to be installed. Click Next. 15 After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click Next. 16 After installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 18. 17 If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 18 If you want to register your machine with the Samusng web site and receive useful information, click On-line Registration. If not, click Finish. For models that have a WPS button, you can set the wireless network using the WPS button (without a USB connection) and access point (or a router) WPS button. Items to prepare Access point (or wireless router) Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine The machine installed with a wireless network interface Creating the infrastructure network Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 1 Turn on your computer, access point, and machine. 2 3 4 Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 206 Wireless network setup 5 Select Using the WPS button and click Next. 7 Follow the instructions on the window to set up the wireless network. For models with a display screen, follow the steps below. For models that support WPS button, the above window appears. If your machine is connected with a USB cable, the above window does not appear. Disconnect the USB cable if you want to set up the wireless network using the WPS button. If you want to set up the wireless network using the USB cable, refer to
"Access point via USB cable" on page 202. 6 The next window asks you to check if your access point (or wireless router) supports WPS or not. If the access point (or wireless router) has a WPS button, select Yes and click Next.
(WPS) button on the control panel for a Press and hold the about 2-4 seconds. The machine waits up to 2 minutes for the WPS button on the access point (or a router) to be pressed. b Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
-
-
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point
(or wireless router). Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 207 Wireless network setup
-
SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection process, the APs SSID information appears on the display. For models without a display screen, follow the steps below. a Press and hold the
(WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly. The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the access point (or wireless router). b Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
-
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED while it is connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
- When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. 12 After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 14. 13 If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 14 If you want to register your machine with the Samusng web site and receive useful information, click On-line Registration. If not, click Finish. Ad hoc via USB cable If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by following the simple steps below. The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next. 8 9 Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears. 10 Select the components to be installed. Click Next. 11 After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click Next. Items to prepare Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 208 Wireless network setup Creating the ad hoc network in Windows 1 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2 Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine. 3 4 5 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. The software searches the wireless network. If the software has failed to search the network, check if the USB cable is connected properly between the computer and machine, and follow the instructions in the window. 6 7 After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears. If you want to use the Samsung default ad hoc setting, select the last wireless network on the list, Network Name(SSID) is Portthru and Signal is Printer Self Network. Then, click Next. If you want to change the ad hoc settings, click the Advanced Setting button. Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID is case-sensitive). Operation Mode: Select ad hoc. Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz). Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128). Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security enabled. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. If you want to use other ad hoc settings, select another wireless network from the list. 8 The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and click Next. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 209 Wireless network setup Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computers network configuration information. If the computers network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computers network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. For example, If the computers network information is as shown follows:
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machines network information should be as below:
-
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computers subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 IP address: 169.254.133.43 The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next. 9 10 When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click Next. If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow the steps in the window. Click Next if you are finished with the computers wireless network settings. If you set the computers wireless network to DHCP, it will take several minutes to receive the IP address. 11 Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears. 12 Select the components to be installed. Click Next. 13 After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click Next. 14 After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 16. 15 If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 210 Wireless network setup 16 If you want to register your machine with the Samusng web site and receive useful information, click On-line Registration. If not, click Finish. 17 Setup using Macintosh Items to prepare Access point Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable Access point via USB cable Turn on your computer, access point, and machine. 1 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2 3 4 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 5 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. 6 Click Continue. 7 8 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 9 When the message that warns that all applications will close on your Read the license agreement and click Continue. computer appears, click Continue. 10 Click Wireless Network Setting button on the User Options Pane. 11 The software searches the wireless network. If the software has failed to search the network, check if the USB cable is connected properly between the computer and machine, and follow the instructions in the window. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 211 Wireless network setup If wireless network setting has been set before, Wireless Network Setting Information window appears. If you want to reset the wireless settings, check the check box and click Next. For models that support the WPS button (without a USB cable connection), the window shown below will appear. 12 Select the method to use from the wireless set up method window.
- With a USB Cable: Connect the USB cable and click Next, then go to step 7.
- Using the WPS Button: See "Access point via WPS button (without a USB cable connection)" on page 206. Configure the wireless settings manually.: Go to step 13. Configure the wireless settings by pressing the WPS button on the access point.: Connect to the wireless network by press the WPS button on the access point (or a wireless router).
-
Follow the instructions in the window. When you are done setting the wireless network settings, go to step 16. 13 After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you are using and click Next. When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting. Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive). Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 212 Wireless network setup Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP, AES) Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security enabled. The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ according to its security mode: WEP or WPA. WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter the WEP security key. Click Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click Next. WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 213 Wireless network setup 14 The window shows the wireless network settings and check if settings are right. Click Next. 15 When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next. For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP. For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computers network configuration information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For example:
If the computers network information is shown as follows:
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
-
Then, the machines network information should be as shown below:
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computers subnet mask.) Gateway: 169.254.133.1 If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the machine when configuring the wireless network. 16 Wireless network setting is completed. To print from a Wi-Fi Direct supported mobile device, set the Wi-Fi Direct Option (see "Setting up Wi-
Fi Direct" on page 223). Wi-Fi Direct Option:
Wi-Fi Direct Option appears on the screen only if your printer supports this feature. Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 223). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 214 Wireless network setup Network Name(SSID): The default Network Name is the model name and the maximum length is 22 characters (not including "Direct-xx-"). Network Key is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters. Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface Creating the infrastructure network 17 When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. 18 Wireless network set up is completed. After the installation is finished, click Quit. After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Macintosh"
on page 174). Setting the access point using the WPS button For models that have a WPS button, you can set the wireless network using the WPS button (without a USB connection) and access point (or a router) WPS button. Items to prepare Access point (or wireless router) Network-connected computer Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 1 Turn on your computer, access point, and machine. 2 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. 5 Click Continue. 6 7 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 8 When the message that warns that all applications will close on your Read the license agreement and click Continue. computer appears, click Continue. 9 Click the Wireless Network Setting button on the User Options Pane. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 215 Wireless network setup 10 Select Using the WPS button and click Next. 12 Follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network. For models with a display screen, follow the steps below:
For models that support the WPS button, the above window appears. If your machine is connected with a USB cable, the above window does not appear. Disconnect the USB cable if you want to set up the wireless network using the WPS button. If you want to set up the wireless network using the USB cable, refer to
"Access point via USB cable" on page 211. 11 The next window asks you to check if your access point (or wireless router) supports WPS or not. If the access point (or wireless router) has a WPS button, select Yes and click Next.
(WPS) button on the control panel for a Press and hold the about 2-4 seconds. The machine waits up to 2 minutes for the WPS button on the access point (or a router) to be pressed. b Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
-
-
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point
(or wireless router). Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 216 Wireless network setup
-
SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection process, the APs SSID information appears on the display. For models without a display screen, follow the steps below:
a Press and hold the
(WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly. The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the access point (or wireless router). b Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
-
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
- When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. 13 Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click Quit. After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Macintosh"
on page 174). Ad hoc via USB cable If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by following these simple directions. Items to prepare Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable Creating the ad hoc network in Macintosh Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 1 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2 Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine. 3 4 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 5 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. 6 Click Continue. 7 Read the license agreement and click Continue. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 217 Wireless network setup 8 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 9 When the message that warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue. 10 Click Wireless Network Setting button on the User Options Pane. 11 The software searches for wireless network devices. If the search has failed, check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly, and follow the instructions in the window. 12 After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears. If you want to use the Samsung default ad hoc setting, select the last wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is Portthru and Signal is Printer Self Network. Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128). Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security setting. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. Then, click Next. If you want to use other ad hoc settings, select another wireless network from the list. 13 The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the settings and click Next. If you want to change ad hoc settings, click the Advanced Setting button. Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is case-
sensitive). Operation Mode: Select ad hoc. Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 218 Wireless network setup Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computers network configuration information. If the computers network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computers network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. For example, If the computers network information is shown as follows:
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machines network information should be as shown below:
-
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computers subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 IP address: 169.254.133.43 14 When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next. If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the machine when configuring the wireless network. 15 The wireless network connects according to the network configuration. 16 Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click Quit. After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Macintosh"
on page 174). Using a network cable Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 24). 18 Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration procedures. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 219 Wireless network setup After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 183). See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless network, for information about your network configuration. Items to prepare Access point Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface Network cable IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows) This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. See "Setting IP address" on page 180. Configuring the machines wireless network Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network. To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru Web Service. Printing a network configuration report Using SyncThru Web Service You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration report. Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection status. See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 180. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 220 Wireless network setup 1 Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. 7 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your machines new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 4 Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 6 Click Wireless > Wizard. Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom. Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list. SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is case sensitive. Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless connections (see "Wireless network name and network key" on page 195).
-
-
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer-to-peer environment. Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point. If your networks Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machines SSID. Note that portthru is the default SSID of your machine. 8 Click Next. If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered password (network key) and click Next. 9 The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If the setup is right, click Apply. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 221 Wireless network setup 19 Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously. Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off If your machine has a display, you can also turn on/off the Wi-Fi from the machines control panel using the Network menu. 1 Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your machines new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 4 Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 6 Click Wireless > Custom. You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off. 20 Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connecting between method for your printer and a mobile device that provides a secure connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode. With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while concurrently connecting to an access point, You can also use a wired network and a Wi-Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print documents both from Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 222 Wireless network setup You cannot connect to the internet through the printers Wi-Fi Direct. The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct networks do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP services. Setting up Wi-Fi Direct You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods. From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended) When setting from the supplied software CD, see the access point via USB cable.
- Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 202.
- Macintosh user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 211. After the driver installation is complete, Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be set and changes in the Wi-Fi Direct can be made. Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows and Macintosh OS users only.
-
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Device Settings >
Network. Wi-Fi Direct On/Off: Select On to enable. Device Name: Enter the printers name for searching for your printer on a wireless network. By default, the device name is the model name. IP Address: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is used only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless network. We recommend using the default local IP address (the default local IP address of the printer for Wi-Fi Direct is 192.168.3.1 ) Group Owner: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi Direct groups owner. The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless access point. We recommend activating this option. Network Key: If your printer is a Group Owner, a Network Key is required for other mobile devices to connect to your printer. You can configure a network key yourself, or can remember the given Network Key that is randomly generated by default. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 223 Wireless network setup From the machine (Machines with a display screen) Select Network > Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct from the control panel. Enable Wi-Fi Direct. From the network-connected computer If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable and configure Wi-Fi Direct from SyncThru Web Service. Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings >
Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct. Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct and set other options. For Linux OS users,
- Print an IP network configuration report to check the output (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 180).
- Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings
> Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
- Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct. Setting up the mobile device After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the mobile device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct. After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing application (For example: Samsung Mobile printer) to print from your smartphone. When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your mobile device, select the printer and the printer's LED will blink. Press the WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile device. If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, you need to enter the "Network Key" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 224 Wireless network setup 21 Troubleshooting for wireless network Problems during setup or driver installation Printers Not Found Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the machine. USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect the machine to your computer using the USB cable. The machine does not support wireless networking. Check the machine's user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and prepare a wireless network machine. Connecting Failure - SSID Not Found The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try connecting again. Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 225 Wireless network setup Connecting Failure - Invalid Security Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your access point and machine. Connecting Failure - General Connection Error Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB cable and your machines power. Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired network cable from your machine. PC Connection Error The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and machine.
-
For a DHCP network environment The machine receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when computer is configured to DHCP. If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode, the problem may be caused by the automatically changed IP address. Compare the IP address between the product's IP address and the printer port's IP address. How to compare:
1 Print the network information report of your printer, and then check the IP address (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 180). 2 Check the printer port's IP address from your computer. a Click the Windows Start menu. b For Windows Server 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers. c Right-click your machine. d For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. If Printer properties item has mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. e Click Port tab. f Click Configure Port... button. g Check if Printer Name or IP Address: is the IP address on the network configuration Sheet. 3 Change the printer port's IP address if it is different from the network information report's. If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP, Connect to a network printer. Then reconnect the IP address. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 226 Wireless network setup
-
For a Static network environment The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured to static address. For example, If the computers network information is as shown below:
IP address: 169.254.133.42 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 IP address: 169.254.133.43 Then the machines network information should be as below:
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computers subnet mask.) Gateway: 169.254.133.1 Other problems If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own user's guide. Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be turned on. Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the signal. Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network communication. Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the communication. If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and try searching for the machine again. Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can check the IP address by printing the network configuration report. Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless router) administrator. Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset. Register the product's MAC address when you confogure the DHCP server on the access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP address that is set with the MAC address. You can identify the Mac address of your machine by printing a network configuration report (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 180). Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user's information before connecting to the access point (or wireless router). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 227 Wireless network setup This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported. When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista, you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine. You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for Samsung wireless network machines. The machine is within the range of the wireless network. The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless router) and the machine. Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete. The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the wireless signal. Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave oven and some Bluetooth devices. Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router) changes, you must do the product's wireless network setup again. The maximum number of device that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 4. If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, the connection between the AP and the machine will be the 802.11 b/g interface. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 228 Samsung MobilePrint 22 What is Samsung MobilePrint?
Samsung MobilePrint is a free application that enables users to print photos, documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung MobilePrint is not only compatible with your Android, Windows and iOS smart phones but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile device to a network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi-Fi access point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isnt necessary just simply install the Samsung MobilePrint application, and it will automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos, web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have Samsung multfunction printer, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for quick and easy viewing on your mobile device. 24 Supported Mobile OS Android OS 2.1 or higher iOS 3.0 or higher Windows Phone 7 or higher 25 Supported devices iOS 3.0 or higher: iPod Touch, iPhone, iPad Android 2.1 or higher: Galxy S, Galaxy S2, Galaxy Tab, and Android Mobile Devices 23 Downloading Samsung MobilePrint Windows Phone 7 or higher: Samsung Windows Phone (Focus, Omina7, and OminaW) To download Samsung MobilePrint, go to the application store on your mobile device, and just search for Samsung MobilePrint. You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices or Marketplace for Windows devices on your computer. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 229 AirPrint 26 This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Software" on page 7). 4 Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. If its your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch running iOS 4.2 or later. ID: admin Password: sec00000 Setting up AirPrint Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following methods. 27 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings. 6 Click Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP or mDNS . You can enable the IPP protocol or mDNSprotocol. Printing via AirPrint 1 Check whether the machine is connected to the network. 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your machines new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3 Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
Touch the action icon(
1 Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print. 2 3 4 Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up. Touch Print button. Print it out.
). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 230 AirPrint Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary, click the print center icon (
) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in the print center. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 231 3. Useful Setting Menus This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for advanced machine setup. Before you begin reading a chapter Print Copy Fax Scan System setup Admin setup Custom setup Eco Direct USB 233 234 235 241 246 250 262 263 264 265 Before you begin reading a chapter This chapter explains all the features available for this series' models to help users easily understand the features. You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide (see "Menu overview" on page 36). The following are tips for using this chapter The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machines functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing
(Menu). Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. For models that do not have the
(Menu) on the control panel, this feature is not applicable (see "Control panel overview" on page 26). Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models. 3. Useful Setting Menus 233 Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Print Setup on the touch screen. Emulation Print Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > Print Setup on the control panel. Item Description Selects the direction in which information is printed on a page. Portrait Orientation Landscape Copies You can enter the number of copies using the number keypad. Item Description Resolution Specifies the number of dots printed per inch (dpi). The higher the setting, the sharper printed characters and graphics. Clear Text Prints text darker than on a normal document. Sets the emulation type and option. Emulation Type: The machine language defines how the computer communicates with the machine. Setup: Sets the detailed settings for the selected emulation type. Edge Enhance It allows user to enhance sharpness of text and graphics for improving readability. Trapping Screen It reduces the white gap caused by misalignment of color channels in color printing mode. Also black text will be overprinted on other colors. This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. Normal: This mode will generate printouts with smooth tone over the entire page. Enhanced: This mode will generate printouts with sharp texts and smooth graphic/photo objects in the page. Detailed: This mode will generate printouts with sharp details over the entire page. Select Tray Sets the select tray type. 3. Useful Setting Menus 234 Copy 1 Copy feature Item Description Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see
"Reduced or enlarged copy" on page 72). Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). Reduce/Enlarge If the machine is set Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not available. To change the menu options:
Press
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Copy Default on the touch screen. Or press Copy > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Item Description Original Size Sets the image size. Copies You can enter the number of copies using the number keypad. Darkness Original Type Auto Color Basic Copy Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 71) Improves the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job (see "Original Type" on page 72) You can sets whether to use Auto color on or off. Copies can be started quickly. Custom Copy Copies can be customized through detailed options. 3. Useful Setting Menus 235 Copy Item Description Item Description Color Mode Tray Stamp You can select the default color mode to use for copy jobs. Auto: Select this setting to automatically detect whether the scanned document is in color or black and white, and then select an appropriate color setting. Color: Select this setting to print the same as the original image color. Mono: Select this setting to print the copy in black and white, regardless whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white. Allows you to check the current tray settings and change the settings if necessary. Auto: You can set the machine to automatically to the tray with the same sized paper when the tray in use is empty. You can apply the stamp feature. Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page number, device information, comment, or user ID, to the copy output. Opacity: You can select the transparency. Position: Sets the positon. Auto Fit Copy Copies image to fit automatically to the paper size. Layout ID Copy Collation Collation Copy Adjusts the layout format such as ID copy, 2/4-up, etc. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card (see "ID card copying" on page 73). Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2 copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second complete document. On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals. Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages. 3. Useful Setting Menus 236 Copy Item 2-up or 4-up N-up Copy Description Item Description Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper. 1 3 2 4 2 1 Book Copy The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire book. If the book is too thick, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the cover open. Off: Does not use this feature. Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the book. Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the book. Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of the book. This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. 3. Useful Setting Menus 237 Copy Item Description Item Description Adjust Bkgd. Adjust Background Prints an image without its background. This copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an original containing color in the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog. Off: Does not use this feature. Auto: Optimizes the background. Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is. Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter Edge Erase the background is. Allows you to erase spots, drill holes, fold creases and staple marks along any of the four edges of a document. Off: Does not use this feature. SmallOriginal: rases the edge of the original if it is small. This feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Hole Punch: Erases the marks of bookbinding holes. Book Center: Erases the middle part of the paper which is black and horizontal, when you copy a book. This feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Border Erase: Enter the left, right, top, bottom margin using Number keypad. 3. Useful Setting Menus 238 Copy Item Description Item Description 2->1Sided 2->2Sided 2->1Sided Rotated Duplex (continue) The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. Watermark copying You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper. 1 Sided: Prints in normal mode. 1->2Sided Duplex 1->2Sided Rotated 3. Useful Setting Menus 239 Copy Copy Setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 2 To change the menu options:
Press
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel. Item Description Change Default The copy options can be set to those most frequently used. 3. Useful Setting Menus 240 Fax Fax Feature Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 3 To change the menu options:
Press
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Feature on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Fax Default on the touch screen. Or press Fax > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Fax Setup on the touch screen. Resolution Color Mode Item Description Duplex Original Size Sets the image size. Original Type Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the original document being scanned. Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 79). Item Description The default document settings procedure good results when using typical text-based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax (see "Resolution" on page 78). Selects the color mode in which you want to send the fax. Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white. Color: Transmits a fax in color. You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper. 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only. 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides. 2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees. To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the originals on the DADF. If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF, it automatically changes the option to 1 Sided. Manual Send On Hook Dial Fax can be customized through detailed options. Access a dial tone to send fax. 3. Useful Setting Menus 241 Fax Item Description Item Description Speed Dial Send Fax image to destination from speed dial list. Group Dial Send Fax image to destination from group dial list. Secure Receive Redial Multi Send Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode (see "Redialing the fax number" on page 300). Sends a fax to multiple destinations (see "Sending a fax to multiple destinations" on page 77). You cannot send a color fax using this feature. Delay Send Delayed Send Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present (see "Delaying a fax transmission" on page 302). 4 Stores the received fax in memory without printing out. To print received documents, you need to enter the password. You can prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people (see "Receiving in secure receiving mode" on page 308). Cancel Job Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory
(see "Canceling a reserved fax job" on page 302). Sending setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). You cannot send a color fax using this feature. To change the menu options:
Send Forward Receive Forward Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax or PC. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful. See "Forwarding a sentfax to another destination"
on page 303. See "Forwarding a received fax" on page 303. Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Fax Default on the touch screen. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Fax Setup on the touch screen. 3. Useful Setting Menus 242 Fax Item Redial Times Description Item Description Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the machine will not redial. Dial Mode Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse. This setting may not be available depending on your country. Sends faxes at a preset toll-saving time to save on call costs. This setting may not be available depending on your country. Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax options such as machine ID, fax number, etc. Redial Term Sets the time interval before automatic redialling. Prefix Dial ECM Mode Fax Confirmation Fax Send Confirmation Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number dials before any automatic dial number is started. It is useful for accessing a PABX exchange. Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM) to makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any error. It may take more time. Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission was successfully completed or not. If you select On-Error, the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not successful. 5 Toll Save Setup Wizard Receiving setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). Modem speed Image TCR Select the maximum modem speed you want if the phone line fails to sustain a higher modem speed. You can select 33.6, 28.8, 14.4, 12.0, 9.6 or 4.8 kbps. Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of the first page of the fax sent. To change the menu options:
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Fax Default on the touch screen. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Fax Setup on the touch screen. 3. Useful Setting Menus 243 Description Item Description Fax Item Receive Mode Selects the default fax receiving modesee "Changing the receive modes" on page 305. Ring To Answer Specifies the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call. Duplex Print Stamp RCV Name Rcv Start Code Auto Reduction Discard Size DRPD Mode Automatically prints the page number, and the date and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a received fax. Initiates fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to *9* at the factory. Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine. Discards a specific length from the end of the received fax. Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. You can set the machine to recognize different ring patterns for each number. This setting may not be available depending on your country (see "Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 307). Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper. You can save the paper usage. Off: Prints only one side of the paper. Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however, the binding will be the long edge. Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however, the binding will be the short edge. 3. Useful Setting Menus 244 Fax Change Default setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 6 To change the menu options:
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Change Default on the control Press panel. Item Description Change Default The fax options can be set to those most frequently used. 3. Useful Setting Menus 245 Scan Scan feature Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 7 To change the menu options:
Press
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Scan Default on the touch screen. Item FTP Feature FTP Default Scan to FTP SMB Feature SMB Default Scan to SMB Scan to Local PC Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Scan to Network PC Item USB Default USB Feature Scan to USB Email Default Scan to Custom Email Scan to Email Description Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a USB device. Sets scan destination to an email. You scan the originals and email the scanned image to destinations (see
"Scanning to email" on page 292). Description Sets scan destination to an FTP server. You scan the originals and send the scanned image to an FTP server
(see "Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 293). Sets scan destination to an SMB server. You scan the originals and send the scanned image to an SMB server
(see "Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 293). Sets scan destination to a usb-connected computer. You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a directory such as My Documents (see "Basic Scanning"
on page 75). Sets scan destination to a network-connected computer. You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a directory such as My Documents (see
"Scanning from network connected machine" on page 291). 3. Useful Setting Menus 246 Scan Item Description To change the menu options:
Press
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Scan Default on the touch screen. Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Item Description Destination Enter the destinations information. Change Default Original Size Original Type Resolution The scan options can be set to those most frequently used. Sets the image size. Sets the original documents type. Sets the image resolution. File Format Selects the file format of the scanned output. PDF: Scans originals in PDF format. You can open JPEG: Scans originals in JPEG format the file with the Adobe Acrobat Reader. TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File Format). If you want several originals to be scanned as one file, press Multi-TIFF. XPS: Scans originals in XPS (XML Paper Specification). XPS: This feature is only supported for the devices that has mass storage. Scan to Shared Folder Sets scan destination to a shared folder. You can create and use the shared folder (see "Using shared folder features" on page 310). Scan setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 8 3. Useful Setting Menus 247 Scan Item Description Item Description Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to scan. Color Mode File Format You can select the color options of scan outputs. Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel. Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel. Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit Duplex per pixel. Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If you select JPEG, TIFF, XPS or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.
XPS: This feature is only supported for the devices that has mass storage. The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option, if Mono has been selected for Color Mode. File Policy Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of the paper (2 Sided Rotated). 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides. 2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, the machine shows the window asking to place another page. Load another original and press Yes. When you finish, select No for this option. You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through server or USB memory device. If the server or the USB memory device already has the same name you enter, you can change the name, cancel the job, or overwrite it. Rename: The sent file is saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed. Overwrite: Overwrites the existing the file. File Name Makes a file name to store the scan data. 3. Useful Setting Menus 248 Scan Item Description Item Description You can set the machine to print server confirmation result report. CC BCC If you select On-Error, the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not successful. Scan to WSD Server Confirmation Email Confirmation You can set the machine to print email confirmation result report. If you select On-Error, the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not successful. If a report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support, Unknown could be printed instead of the characters/
fonts in the report. PDF Encryption Encrypts the PDF files when you scan the originals in PDF format. Select On to encrypt the PDF file, and set up a password. To open the file, users need to enter the password Subject From Sets an emails subject one. Sets a senders email address one. Sends the copy of the email to an additional recipient. The same as CC but the recipient's name is not displayed Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on the connected computer if it supports the WSD (Web Service for Device) feature. 3. Useful Setting Menus 249 System setup Machine setup 9 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). Receive code Item Description This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without going to the fax machine *9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory (see "Receiving faxes with an extension telephone" on page 307). To change the menu options:
Select Country Sets the select country. Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control panel. Sound/Volume Sets sound/volume option. Toner Status Alert If toner in the cartridge has run out, a message informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for this message to appear or not. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Initial Setup on the touch screen. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Item Machine ID Fax Number Description Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of each fax page that you send. Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of each fax page that you send. Date & Time Sets the date and time. Clock Mode Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr. and 24 hr. Receive Mode Selects the default fax receiving mode. 3. Useful Setting Menus 250 System setup Item Description Item Description You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the memory. The machine overwrites the data with different patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery. Manual: When printing, copying, scanning, and faxing, the machine temporarily uses memory space. For security reasons, you can set the machine to manually overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you want to secure memory space, you can manually overwrite secure non-volatile memory. Automatic: When a job is completed, there are temporal images left in the memory. For security reasons, you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you want to secure memory space, you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non-volatile memory Sets the language of the text that appears on the control panel display. Sets the machines default mode among fax mode, copy mode, or scan mode. System Timeout Job Timeout Wakeup Event Sets the time that the machine remembers previously used copy settings. After the timeout, the machine restores the default copy settings. Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing the last page of a print job that does not end with a command to print the page. You can set the condition to wake up from power-save mode. Set the item on. ButtonPress: When you press any button except power button, the machine wake up from the power save mode. Scanner: When you insert paper in the document feeder, the machine wake up from the power save mode. Printer: When you open or close the paper tray, the machine wake up from the power save mode. USB Host: When you connect the USB host, the machine wake up from the power save mode. ImageOverwrite Language Default Mode Default Paper Size You can set the default paper size to use. Power Save Sets how long the machine waits before going to power save mode. When the machine does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered. 3. Useful Setting Menus 251 System setup Item Description Item Description Determine whether or not the machine continues printing when it detects the paper does not match the paper settings. Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine waits until you insert the correct paper. On: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error message will display. The machine waits for about 30 second, then automatically clear the message and continue printing. Optimize print quality according to the machines altitude. Paper Substitution Skip Blank Pages Allows you to append the required carriage return to each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users. Tray Protection Auto Continue Altitude Adjustment Auto CR Firmware Version Shows the products firmware version. Auto Tray Switch Determine whether or not the machine continues printing when it detects the paper does not match. For example, if both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same size paper, the machine automatically prints from tray 2 after the tray 1 runs out of paper. This option does not appear if you selected Auto for Paper Source from printer driver. Automatically substitutes the printer drivers paper size to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4. For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set the paper size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine prints on A4 paper and vice versa. The printer detects the printing data from computer whether a page is empty or not. You can set to print or skip the blank page. Decides to use or not use the Auto tray switch feature. If you set tray 1 to On, for example, then tray 1 is excluded during tray switching. This setting works for copy or print jobs: It doesn't affect fax jobs. 3. Useful Setting Menus 252 System setup Item Description Allows you to select the PDF type when saving the data as a PDF file. Standard: Saves the data as a regular PDF. PDF/A: Saves the data as a PDF that has the necessary information to render itself in any environment. PDF Type Stamp PDF/A file must be self-contained: it cannot rely on another application to render fonts, open hyperlinks, or execute scripts, audio files, or video files. Eco Settings You can apply the stamp feature. Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page number, device information, or user ID, to the copy output. Opacity: You can select the transparency. Position: Sets the positon. Image Management Image Mar. Custom Color Address Book Views or prints the phone book or email address list. Import Setting Export Setting Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to the machine. Exports data stored on a USB memory stick to the machine. Item CLR Empty Msg Description When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You can clear the empty message. Troubleshooting Helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. Allows you to save print resources and enables eco-
friendly printing. Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode on or off. On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco mode on with password. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode on/off, the user needs to enter the password. Select Template: Selects the eco template set from the SyncThru Web Service. Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color registration, color density, etc. This menu allows you to adjust contrast, color by color. Default: Optimizes colors automatically. Print Density: Allows you to manually adjust the color density for print. Adjust the print density. It is recommended to use the Default setting for best color quality. 3. Useful Setting Menus 253 System setup Item Auto Color Reg. Description The machine virtually prints certain patterned image to calibrate the color printing position. This feature enhances the colored image sharper and clearer,which means the machine prints the colored image on the paper more like the one in the monitor. Paper setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 10 If you have moved the machine, it is strongly recommended to operate this menu manually. To change the menu options:
Tone Adjustment Default: The machine automatically calibrate the toner density of machine for the best possible color print quality. If you select Off, the machine is calibrated by the factory default toner density. Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Paper Setup on the touch screen. Item Description Auto Tone Adjust: Allows you to automatically adjust tone for the best possible print quality. Paper Size Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according to your requirements. Manual Tone Adj.: Allows you to manually adjust tone for the best possible print quality. Cal. ID Sensor: Automatically calculates the reduced or worn out supplies like toner or machine parts and uses this information to adjust the color density. For example, if the yellow toner is running out, the machine calculates the amount of remaining yellow toner and adjusts color density so the printouts are fine. Paper Type Chooses the type of the paper for each tray. Paper Source Selects from which tray the paper is used. Margin Sets the margins for the document. 3. Useful Setting Menus 254 System setup Item Description Item Description Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided printing. Duplex Margin: Sets the margin for double-sided
<Tray X>
printing. Sets the paper margins for the paper trays. Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided printing. Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided printing. Common Margin Emulation Margin MP Tray Binding: When printing on both sides of the paper, side A's margin closest to the binding will be the same as side B's margin closest to the binding. Likewise, the sides' margins farthest from the binding will be the same. Sets the paper margins for emulation print page. Top Margin: Sets the top margin. Left Margin: Sets the left margin. Sets the paper margins in multi-purpose tray. Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided printing. Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided printing. Sound / Volume Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 11 To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Sound on the control panel. Manual Feeder Sets the paper margins in manual feeder tray. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Initial Setup > Sound/Volume on the Tray Confirm Activates the tray confirmation message. If you open and close a tray, a window asking you whether to set the paper size and type for the tray just opened appears. touch screen. Item Key Sound Description Turns the key sound on oroff. With this option set to on, a tone sounds each time a key is pressed. 3. Useful Setting Menus 255 System setup Item Description Alarm Sound Turns the alarm sound on oroff. With this option set to on, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication ends. Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to Comm. which means the speaker is on until the remote machine answers. Speaker volume You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial. You can adjust the speaker volume only when the telephone line is connected. a Press b Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from
(fax) on the control panel. the speaker. c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you want. d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and return to ready mode. Dial Tone volume Adjusts the dial tone volume. you can select level. Ringer volume Adjusts the ringer volume. you can select level. Demo Page Report Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 12 To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Report on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Reports on the touch screen. Item Description Configuration Supplies Info. Supplies Information Address Book Prints a report on the machine's overall configuration. Prints supplies information page. Prints all of the email addresses currently stored in the machines memory. Prints the demo page to check whether your machine is printing properly or not. Fax Send Confirmation Fax Confirmation Prints fax confirmation result. 3. Useful Setting Menus 256 System setup Item Description Fax Sent Fax Received Email Sent Fax Scheduled Jobs Network Configuration PCL Font List PS Font List Usage Counter Prints information on the faxes you have recently sent. Prints information on the faxes you have recently received. Prints information on the emails you have recently sent. Prints the document list currently stored for delayed faxes along with the starting time and type of each operation. Prints information on your machines network connection and configuration. Prints the PCL font list. Prints the PS/PS3 font list. Prints a usage page. The usage page contains the total number of pages printed. Fax Options Prints the information of a fax reports. Account This is used only available when Job Accounting is enabled from the SyncThru Web Admin Service. You can print a report of printout counts for each user. Maintenance Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 13 To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance on the control panel. Item Description CLR Empty Msg. When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You can clear the empty message. Supplies Life Shows the supply life indicators (see "Monitoring the supplies life" on page 103.) TonerLow Alert Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty
(see "Setting the toner low alert" on page 104). Serial Number Shows the machines serial number. When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website, you can find this. Image Mar. Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color registration, color density, etc. 3. Useful Setting Menus 257 System setup Clear setting Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 14 To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Clear Setting on the control panel. Press Setup > Machine Setup > Restore Options on the touch screen. Item Description All Settings Fax Setup Fax Default Copy Setup Copy Default Scan Setup Scan Default System Setup Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets all of your settings to the factory default. Restores all of the fax options to the factory default. Restores all of the copy options to the factory default. Restores all of the scan options to the factory default. Restores all of the system options to the factory default. 15 Description Restores all of the network options to the factory default. (Reboot required.) Clears all of the email address entries stored in memory. Clears all records of sent faxes. Clears all records of sent emails. Clears all records of received faxes. Item Network Setup Address Book Fax Sent Sent Report Email Sent Fax Received Rcvd Report Job manage Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 3. Useful Setting Menus 258 System setup To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Job Manage on the control panel. Item Active Job Store Job Description Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be printed. Shows the print job lists that are stored on the disk. Secured Job Shows the print job lists that are secured on the disk. Option Description Print Reset Prints the address book. Resets the current address book Document box Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). 17 Address book setup 16 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). Press Setup > Machine Setup > Address Book on the touch screen. Option PhoneBook Email Description Adds, views, prints or deletes the phone book list. You also can create a group. Adds, views, prints or deletes the email list. You also can create a group. Press Document Box > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Option System Boxes Description Stores the printing data or prints the secure page. Stored Print: Prints out the stored data without entering password. Secured Print: Prints out the stored data with entering password. Shared Folder Show the shared folders on your network and save your jobs there. 3. Useful Setting Menus 259 System setup 18 Network setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service. Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine. When SyncThru Web Service opens, click Settings >
Network Settings (see "Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 319). Press
(Menu)> System Setup> Network on the control panel, Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Network Setup on the touch screen. Option Description Option TCP/IP (IPv6) Description Selects this option to use the network environment through IPv6 (see "IPv6 configuration" on page 192). Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmission speed. 802.1x You can selects the user authentication for network communication. For detailed information consult the network administrator. Wireless Selects this option to use the wireless network. Clear Settings Network Configuration Net. Activate Ethernet Activate Reverts the network settings to the default values.
(Reboot required.) This list shows information on your machines network connection and configuration. You can sets whether to use Ethernet on or off. Http Activate You can sets whether to use SyncThru Web Service or not. Selects the appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment. WINS TCP/IP (IPv4) There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are not sure, leave as is, or consult the network administrator. SNMP V1/V2 You can configure the WINS server. WINS(Windows Internet Name Service) is used in the Windows operating system. You can set SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). Administrators can use SNMP to monitor and manage machines on the network. 3. Useful Setting Menus 260 System setup Option Description SNTP UPNP MDNS SetIP SLP You can set SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) settings. SNTP synchronizes the clocks of the computer systems through the Internet (NTP) so there would not be a time difference when exchanging data. You can set UPNP protocol. You can set mDNS (Multicast Domain Name System) settings. You can set SetIP settings. You can configure SLP (Service Location Protocol) settings. This protocol allows host applications to find services in a local area network without prior configuration. 3. Useful Setting Menus 261 Admin setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). Press Setup > Admin Setup on the touch screen. Item User Access Control Description You can control user access to a machine. You can assign different levels of permissions to use the machine to each user Change Admin. Password Changes the machines password for accessing the Admin Setup. Stamp Sets the stamp feature to access the Admin Setup menu. 3. Useful Setting Menus 262 Custom setup This menu appears only when the XOA (eXtensible Open Architecture) web application is installed. Contact the administrator to use this menu. Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). Press
(Menu) > Custom on the control panel. 3. Useful Setting Menus 263 Eco Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). To change the menu options:
Press Eco > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Item Description Eco-On Settings Select eco mode and change on/off or on-forced option. Sets eco-related settings and change default settings. Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the default mode. Feature Configuration: Select the Default mode or Custom mode. 3. Useful Setting Menus 264 Direct USB Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 36). To change the menu options:
Press Direct USB > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Item Description Print From Scan to USB File Manage Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file to print. Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a USB device. Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file to delete. You can format the USB device. Show Space Shows the remaining space. 3. Useful Setting Menus 265 Direct USB 3. Useful Setting Menus 266 4. Special Features This chapter explains special copying, scanning, faxing, and printing features. Altitude adjustment Storing email address Entering various characters Setting up the fax address book Registering authorized users Printing features Scan features Fax features Using shared folder features Using optional device features 266 267 269 270 273 274 290 300 310 311 The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7. It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. Altitude adjustment Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine for the best print quality. Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are. 4,000 m
(13,123 ft) 3,000 m
(9,842 ft) 2,000 m
(6,561 ft) 1,000 m
(3,280 ft) 0 1 2 3 4 1 High 3 2 High 2 3 High 1 4 Normal You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in
program. For Windows and Macintosh users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings, see
"Device Settings" on page 329. If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the altitude via SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 319). You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machines display (see "Machines basic settings" on page 46). 4. Special Features 266 Storing email address This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently via SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book. 1 Storing on your machine To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up email address using SyncThru Web Service. 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service"
on page 319). 2 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 3 Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 4 Click Address Book > Individual > Add. 5 Select the Speed No. and enter e-mail address and fax number. If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information, check SMB or FTP and set the information. 6 Click Apply. 7 8 If you make a group, click Address Book > E-mail Group > Add Group. Select the Speed No. and enter Group Name. You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s) after this group is created. 9 Click Apply. 4. Special Features 267 Storing email address 2 Searching for an email address Searching sequentially through memory 1 Select
(scan) >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an address group > All on the control panel. Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Email >
View List > Individual or Group on the touch screen. 2 Search through the entire memory in index (numerical) order, and select the name and address you want. Searching with a particular first letter
(scan) on the control panel. 1 Select 2 Press ID on the control panel.
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an address group >
3 4 Enter the first few letters of the name you want. Press the arrows until the name and number you want appears. 4. Special Features 268 Entering various characters As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your companys name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or email addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names. 3 Entering alphanumeric characters Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For example, to enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and finally 6. To find the letter that you want to enter, see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 269. You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice. To delete the last digit or character, press the left/right or up/down arrow button. Keypad letters and numbers Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models. Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you are doing. 4 Key Assigned numbers, letters, or characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
*
#
@ / . 1 A B C a b c 2 D E F d e f 3 G H I g h i 4 J K L j k l 5 M N O m n o 6 P Q R S p q r s 7 T U V t u v 8 W X Y Z w x y z 9
& + - , 0
* % ^ _ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ]
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
# = | ? " : { } < > ;
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.) 4. Special Features 269 Setting up the fax address book You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book. 6 Using speed dial numbers 5 Registering a speed dial number 1 Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View List > Individual >
screen.
(options) > Add on the touch 2 3 4 5 Enter a speed dial number and press OK. If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial number, press
(Back). Enter the name you want and press OK. Enter the fax number you want and press OK. Press the
(Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode. When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax, enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want. 7 For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2 seconds. For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s) and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds. You can print the address book list by selecting
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Print. Editing speed dial numbers 1 Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View List > Individual on the touch screen. Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK. 2 3 Change the name and press OK. 4. Special Features 270 Setting up the fax address book 4 Change the fax number and press OK. 5 Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 8 Registering a group dial number 1 Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next >Address Book > Phone Book > View List > Group>
screen.
(options) > Add on the touch 2 3 4 5 6 Enter a group dial number and press OK. If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial number, press
(Back). Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dials name to put in the group. Select the name and number you want and press OK. Select Yes when Add? appears. Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group. 7 When you have finished, select No when Another No.? appears and press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 8 9 Editing group dial numbers 1 Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View List > Group on the touch screen. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK. Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then Add? appears. Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK, Delete?
appears. Press OK to add or delete the number. Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers. Select No at the Another No.? and press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 4. Special Features 271 Setting up the fax address book 10 Searching address book for an entry
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Print on the control panel. 1 Select ct 2 Press OK. There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan from A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the name associated with the number. The machine begins printing. 1 Select ct or Group Dial on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Search & Dial > Speed Dial Enter All or ID and press OK. Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter you want to search. For example, if you want to find the name MOBILE, press the 6 button, which is labeled with MNO. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 2 3 4 11 Printing address book You can check your
(Address Book) settings by printing a list. 4. Special Features 272 Registering authorized users 8 Enter User Name, Login ID, Password, Confirm Password, E-mail Address, and Fax Number. You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s) after this group is created. 9 Click Apply. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). To send a scanned image, copy image, or fax data through email or via network server safely, you must register account information of authorized users to your local machine using SyncThru Web Service. 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service"
on page 319). 2 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 3 Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 4 Click Security > User Access Control > Authentication. 5 Select Local Authentication in the Authentication Method, and click Apply. 6 Click OK in the confirmation pop-up window. 7 Click User Profile > Add. 4. Special Features 273 Printing features 12 For basic printing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic printing"
on page 64). This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). Changing the default print settings Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. 1 Click the Windows Start menu. 2 3 4 Select Printing preferences. Right-click on your machine. If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer. 5 Change the settings on each tab. 6 Click OK. 13 If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences. Setting your machine as a default machine Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. 1 Click the Windows Start menu. 2 3 4 Select your machine. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer. If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer. 4. Special Features 274 Printing features Using advanced print features 1 Check the Print to file box in the Print window. XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format. See "Features by models" on page 7. The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or higher. Install optional memory when an XPS job does not print because the printer is out of memory. You can install the XPS printer driver when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive. When the installation window appears, select Custom Installation. You can select the XPS printer driver in the Select Software window. 14 Printing to a file (PRN) You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. 2 Click Print. 3 Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For example, c:\Temp\file name. If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My Documents, Documents and Settings, or Users. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. 4. Special Features 275 Printing features Understanding special printer features You can use advanced printing features when using your machine. To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the applications Print window to change the print settings. The machine name, that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. Select the Help menu or click the button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about (see "Using help"
on page 67). Item Description Multiple Pages per Side Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet. 4. Special Features 276 Printing features Item Poster Printing Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together. Description Booklet Printinga 8 9 Double-sided Printing Double-sided Printing (Manual)a Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet. If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media. The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what paper sizes are available. If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without mark). or Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the Double-sided Printing (Manual) option. 4. Special Features 277 Printing features Item Description Double-sided Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the control panel of the machine. Printing This option is available only when you use the PCL/XPS printer driver. Double-sided Printing (Manual)a None: Disables this feature. Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding. Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars. Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing. This option is not available when you use Double-sided Printing (Manual). Paper Options Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the document. Watermark The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. 4. Special Features 278 Printing features Item Watermark
(Creating a watermark) a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window. Description Watermark
(Editing a watermark) a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options. d Click Update to save the changes. e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Watermark
(Deleting a watermark) Overlaya a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. d Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver (see "Software" on page 7). An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your companys letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine: just print the letterhead overlay on your document. To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image. The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark. The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay. 4. Special Features 279 Printing features Item Description Overlaya
(Creating a new page overlay) Overlaya
(Using a page overlay) a To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences. b Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears. c d In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is In the Edit Overlay window, click Create. C:\Formover). e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List. f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive. a Click the Advanced tab. b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list. c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window. After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box. d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document. If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document. e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Overlaya
(Deleting a page overlay) In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab. a b Select Edit in the Text drop down list. c Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box. d Click Delete. e When a confirming message window appears, click Yes. f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use. 4. Special Features 280 Printing features Item Description This feature is available only if you have installed the mass storage device or optional memory (see "Variety feature" on page 10). Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. This feature is not enabled, Storage Options check (see "Setting Device Options" on page 99). Without installing the mass storage device in the machine, the Ram Disk feature provides only 3 options: Normal, Proof, and Confidential. Print Modeb Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory.
- Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory.
- Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can print one copy first to check, then print the rest of the copies later.
- Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a password to print.
- Store: Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device without printing.
- Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time.
- Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If you select this setting, the printer spools the document into the mass storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue, decreasing the computers work load.
- Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time. Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel. User ID: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel. The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows. Enter Password: If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured, you have to enter the password for the document box. This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel. Confirm Password: Re-enter the password to confirm it. 4. Special Features 281 Printing features Item Job Encryption Encrypts printing data first, and transmits it to the machine. This feature protects the printing information even though the data is snatched on a network. Description Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the mass storage device is installed. The mass storage device is used to decrypt the printing data (see "Variety feature" on page 10). a. This option is not available when you use XPS driver. b. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR/ CLX-626xFW Series only. 4. Special Features 282 Printing features Using Direct Printing Utility Printing There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility. Available for Windows OS users only. Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7). 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Direct Printing Utility > Direct Printing Utility. The Direct Printing Utility window appears. 15 What is Direct Printing Utility?
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your machine to print without having to opening the file. To install this program, select Advanced Installation > Custom Installation and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver. Mass storage device should be installed on your machine, to print files using this program. (see "Variety feature" on page 10). You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing. You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing. Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program depends on how the PDF file was created. The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1.7 and below. For higher versions, you must open the file to print it. 2 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click Browse. Select the file you wish to print and click Open. The file is added in the Select Files section. 4 Customize the machine settings for your needs. 5 Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine. Using the right-click menu 1 Right-click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing. The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added. Select the machine to use. 2 3 Customize the machine settings. 4. Special Features 283 Printing features 4 Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine. Changing printer settings Macintosh printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported. 16 Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver settings in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh:
1 Open the document to print. 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications). 3 Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click OK. 4 Open the File menu and click Print. 5 Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print. 6 Click Print. You can use advanced printing features when using your machine. Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following. Printing multiple pages on one sheet You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies. 1 Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2 Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. Select the other options to use. 3 4 Click Print. The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet of paper. 4. Special Features 284 Printing features Printing on both sides of the paper Using help Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page 10). Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver. Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book binding. Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. 1 From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu. 2 3 4 5 Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper. Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option. Select the other options to use. If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy. Linux printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported. 17 4. Special Features 285 Printing features Printing from applications There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application. 1 Open an application, and select Print from the File menu 2 3 Select Print directly using lpr. In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties. Advanced: Sets the print resolution, paper source, and destination. 5 Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window. 6 Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing. 7 The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job. To abort the current job, click Cancel. Printing files 4 Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window. General: Changes the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet. You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you to do that, but the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program. To print any document file:
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications for odd-even printing. Text: Specifies the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing or columns. Graphics: Sets image options that are used when printing image files, such as color options, image size, or image position. 1 Enter lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears. When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click Open. 2 In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change the print job properties. 3 Click OK to start printing. 4. Special Features 286 Printing features Configuring Printer Properties 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window. Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer. 1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator. If necessary, switch to Printers configuration. 2 3 Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties. The Printer Properties window appears. The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
General: Allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration. Connection: Allows you to view or select another port. If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab. Driver: Allows you to view or select another machine driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options. Jobs: Shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list. Classes: Shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class. 2 3 4 Unix printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported (see "Features by models" on page 7). 18 Proceeding the print job After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, or PS files to print. 1 Execute printui <file_name_to_print> command. For example, if you are printing document1 printui document1 This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options. Select a printer that has been already added. Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection. Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies. 4. Special Features 287 Printing features 5 To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, press Properties. Press OK to start the print job. Changing the machine settings Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications for odd-even printing. Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper. Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline, Double-line hairline) The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options in printer Properties. The following hot keys may also be used: H for Help, O for OK, A for Apply, and C for Cancel. Image tab In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your document. General tab Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according to your requirements. Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick. Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto Selection. Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page. Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper. Text tab Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output. Margins tab Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size selected. Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters. 4. Special Features 288 Printing features Printer-Specific Settings tab Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file. 4. Special Features 289 Scan features For basic scanning features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic scanning"
on page 75). This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi. Basic scanning method This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Variety feature" on page 10). 19 You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network. The following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents:
Scan to PC: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder (see
"Basic Scanning" on page 75). TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection (see "Scanning from image editing program" on page 294). Samsung Scan Assistant/Samsung Easy Document Creator: You can use this program to scan images or documents.
-
-
See "Scanning with Samsung Scan Assistant" on page 295. See "Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 322. WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable
(see "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 295). USB Memory: You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto an USB memory device. Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment (See
"Scanning to email" on page 292). FTP/SMB: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP/SMB server (see
"Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 293). 4. Special Features 290 Scan features Setting the scan settings in the computer This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). 20 Scanning from network connected machine The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 24). 21 1 Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager (see "Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager" on page 327). Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD, since the printer driver includes the scan program (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 32). 2 3 4 Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List. Select Scan to PC Settings menu. Select the option you want. Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device. Basic tab: Contains settings related to general scan and device settings. Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering. 5 Press Save > OK. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 3 Select
(Scan) > Scan To PC > Network PC on the control panel. Or select Scan > Network PC on the touch screen. If you see Not Available message, check the port connection. Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if necessary. 4. Special Features 291 Scan features ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for
Switch to advanced modeScan to Settings. Password is the 4 digit number registered password for
Settings. Switch to advanced modeScan to 4 5 Select the option you want and press OK. Scanning begins. Scanned image is saved in computers C:\Users\users name\My Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. Scanning to email This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). 22 Setting up an email account 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service"
on page 319). Select Settings > Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP). Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name. 2 3 4 5 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. authentication. Enter the SMTP server login name and password. Press Apply. If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP, put a check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication. Enter the IP address and port number. 6 7 4. Special Features 292 Scan features Scanning and sending an email 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Select
(scan) > Scan To Email on the control panel. Or select Scan > Send Email on the touch screen. Enter the login name and password if you configured on SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 319). Enter the senders and recipients email address. You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto Send To Self option in the Settings > Scan > Scan To E-mail on SyncThru Web Service. Enter an email subject and press OK. Select the file format to scan, and press OK. Enter the SMTP server login name and password. The machine begins scanning and then sends the email. Scanning to FTP/SMB server This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). 23 Setting up an FTP/SMB server 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service"
on page 319). Select Address Book > Individual > Add. 2 3 Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB. 4 5 6 Check the box next to Anonymous, then the server permits the access Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. of unauthorized people. 7 8 Enter the login name and password. Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain, otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB server. 4. Special Features 293 Scan features Enter the path for saving the scanned image. 24 The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root. The folder properties need to be setup as a share. Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder. 9 10 Press Apply. Scanning and sending to FTP/SMB server 1 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 3 4 5 Select
(scan) > Scan To SMB or Scan To FTP on the control panel. Or select Scan > SMB or FTP on the touch screen. Select a server and scan format you want. The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server. Scanning from image editing program You can scan and import documents at the image editing software such as Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 3 Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop. 4 Click File > Import, and select the scanner device. 5 6 Scan and save your scanned image. Set the scan options. 4. Special Features 294 Scan features 25 Scanning using the WIA driver Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using additional software:
The WIA driver works only on Windows OS (not supported Windows 2000) with a USB port. 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 3 Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start Scan. 4 5 New Scan application appears. 26 6 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture. 7 Scan and save your scanned image. Scanning with Samsung Scan Assistant This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). For Windows, you need to download Scan Assistant from the Samsung website to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). For Macintosh, open the Applications folder > Samsung folder >
Samsung Scan Assistant. For Windows, you can use the OCR (Optical Character Reader) feature from Samsung Scan Assistant program. 1 From the Samsung website, download and unpack the Samsung Scan Assistant software to your computer. Then unpack and install the software. 2 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 4. Special Features 295 Scan features 3 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 4 Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers, and start Samsung Scan Assistant. Select the Help menu or click the any option you want to know about. button from the window and click on Set the scan options. 5 6 Click Scan. Macintosh scanning 27 Start Applications and click Image Capture. If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image Captures help. Select the option you want. Scan and save your scanned image. If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher. 3 4 5 Scanning from network connected machine Scanning from USB connected machine 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). Network or wireless model only (see "Features by models" on page 7). 1 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture. 4. Special Features 296 Scan features 4 According to OS, follow steps below. For 10.4
-
-
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar. Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked. Click Connect. If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port, or If TWAIN UI appears, click Change Port.. from the Preference tab and select a new port. For 10.5 If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates properly Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher. For more information, refer to the Image Captures help. You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop. 28 Linux scanning Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
-
- Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your Scanning machine in Bonjour Devices.
-
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps above. For 10.6 -10.7, select your device below SHARED. 5 6 Set the scan options on this program. Scan and save your scanned image. 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop. 3 Click the button to switch to Scanners Configuration. 4. Special Features 297 Scan features 4 Select the scanner on the list. 8 The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane. 5 Click Properties. 6 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 7 From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview. 9 Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview Pane. 10 Select the option you want. 11 Scan and save your scanned image. For later use, you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job Type drop-down list. 4. Special Features 298 Scan features Editing an image with Image Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image. 4. Special Features 299 Fax features For basic faxing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic faxing" on page 76). This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/CLX-626xND Series (see
"Control panel overview" on page 26). 29 Automatic redialing When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on the country's factory default setting. When the display shows Retry Redial?, press
(Start) button to redial the number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press Clear).
(Stop/
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts. 1 Press panel.
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Setup > Sending on the control 2 3 Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want. Select the option you want. Redialing the fax number
(Redial/Pause) button on the control panel. 1 Press 2 Select the fax number you want. Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown. 3 When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine automatically begins to send. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears. 30 31 Confirming a transmission When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine beeps and returns to ready mode. When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears
(Stop/Clear) to clear on the display. If you receive an error message, press the message and try to send the fax again. 4. Special Features 300 Fax features You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
(Menu) > Fax Setup time sending a fax is completed. Press
> Sending > Fax Confirmation on the control panel.
(fax) >
5 Enter the recipients numbers and select the option Sending a fax in the computer This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). 32 You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine. To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer driver. 1 Open the document to be sent. 2 Select Print from the File menu. The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your application. Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window 3 4 Click Print or OK. Select the Help menu or click the any option you want to know about. button from the window and click on 6 Click Send. 4. Special Features 301 Fax features 33 Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder. Press
(fax) on the control panel. 2 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. 4
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Delay Send on the control panel. Press Or select Fax > Delayed Send > To on the touch screen. Enter the job name and the time. If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at that time on the following day. The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set. You can check the list of delayed fax jobs.
(Menu) > System Setup > Report > Fax Schedule Jobs on the Press control panel. 8 9 5 6 7 Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK. The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document. Canceling a reserved fax job To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat steps 5. 1 Press panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Cancel Job on the control You can add up to 10 destinations. Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore. 2 3 4 Select the fax job you want and press OK. Press OK when Yes highlights. The selected fax is deleted from memory. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 4. Special Features 302 Fax features 34 Forwarding a sentfax to another destination You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful. 3 4 35 Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine. When you forward a fax by an email, you must first set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service (see"Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 319). Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale. Forwarding a received fax You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder. Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale. 2 Press to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel.
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Send Forward > Forward
(fax) >
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Fax Setup > Send Forward >
Forward to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen. Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10). 4. Special Features 303 Fax features 1 Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel. Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Fax Setup > Receive Forward >
Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen. Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10). To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed, select Forward&Print. Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and press OK. Enter the starting tim and ending time, then press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine. 2 3 4 36 Sending faxes on both sides of paper This is available only when you load originals into the document feeder. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder. 2 Press
(fax) > Fax Feature > Duplex on the control panel. Or select Fax > Select the menu you want > Select Duplex from the sub-
menus > on the touch screen. 1 Sided: Send faxes in normal mode. 2 Sided: Send faxes on both sides of the original. 2 Sided Rotated: Send faxes on both sides of the original and prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout is rotated 180. 3 Press OK. 4. Special Features 304 Fax features Receiving a fax in the computer This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). To use this feature, set the option on the control panel:
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
Press Forward to PC > Forward the control panel. Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive Forward > Forward to PC > Forward on the touch screen. 37 Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List. 1 Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager. 2 3 4 Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings. Select Fax to PC Settings menu. Image Type: Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF. Save Location: Select location to save the converted faxes. Prefix: Select prefix. Print received fax: After receiving the fax, set prints information for the received fax. Notify me when complete: Set to show the popup window to notify receiving a fax. Open with default application: After receiving the fax, open it with default application. None: After receiving a fax, the machine does not notify the user or opens the application. Press Save > OK. 5 38 Changing the receive modes 1 Press on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Mode Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default > Common Options > Receive Mode on the touch screen. 2 Select the option you want. Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode. Tel: Receives a fax by pressing
(On Hook Dial) and then
(Start) button. 4. Special Features 305 Fax features Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax. To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. DRPD: You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see
"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 307. This setting may not be available depending on your country. Press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 3 4 39 Receiving manually in Tel mode You can receive a fax call by pressing
(On Hook Dial) button and then
(Start) when you hear a fax tone. If your machine has a handset, pressing you can answer calls using the handset (see "Features by models" on page 7). 40 Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive the fax. If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings. If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring. If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the answering machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation. 4. Special Features 306 Fax features 41 Receiving faxes with an extension telephone When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket, you can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without going to the fax machine. When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you want. While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket, copy and scan features are not available. 42 Receiving faxes using DRPD mode This setting may not be available depending on your country. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. This feature is often used by answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone. This setting may not be available depending on your country. 1 Select Mode > DRPD on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default > Common Options > Receive Mode > DRPD on the touch screen. 2 Call your fax number from another telephone. 3 When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern. When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears. 4 Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2. DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect the machine to another telephone line. After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket. 4. Special Features 307 Fax features Receiving in secure receiving mode This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). 43 You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all incoming faxes go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes with entering the password. 44 To use the secure receiving mode, activate the menu from
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive on the control panel.
(fax) >
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive on the touch screen. Printing received faxes 3 The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory. Printing faxes on both sides of the paper Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder. 2 Press on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Duplex Print Off: Prints in Normal mode. Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book. 1 Select on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > Print Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive
> Print on the touch screen. 2 Enter a four-digit password and press OK. 4. Special Features 308 Fax features Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad. 46 2 3 5 Press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 3 4 45 Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax. If fax is received and being printed, other copy and print jobs cannot be processed at the same time. Printing sent fax report automatically You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates. 1 Press control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Auto Report > On on the 2 Press
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode. 4. Special Features 309 Using shared folder features This feature allows you to use the machines memory as a shared folder. The advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder through your computers window. 48 Using the shared folder You can use the shared folder in the same way exactly like the normal computer. Create, edit and delete the folder or file as a normal Windows folder. You also store the scanned data in the shared folder. You can directly print files stored on a the shared folder. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG and PRN files. 47 This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by models" on page 7). You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device
(see "Variety feature" on page 10). The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict the user s access and also set the maximum number of simultaneous users. Creating a shared folder 1 Open the Windows Explore window from the computer. 2 Enter the printers address example: in the address fieldand press the Enter key or click Go. 3 Create a new folder under nfsroot directory. 4. Special Features 310 Using optional device features
only. Some features may not be available depending depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10). 3 Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list. 49 From the printer driver If you install the optional device, you can use advanced printing features, such as proofing a job and printing a private job in the Print window. Check the mass storage or RAM disk option in Device Options, then you can select the various features from Print Mode (see "Setting Device Options" on page 99). 1 Open the document you want to print. 2 Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 4 Click Properties or Preferences . 5 Click the each tab then select Print Mode. 6 Select the option you want (see "Understanding special printer features"
on page 276). Select OK. 7 50 From the control panel If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive, you can use
(Menu)buttonSystem Setup> Job Manage. these features from the 4. Special Features 311 Using optional device features Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. Active JobAll of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active job queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner. Secured Job: You can print or delete a secured job. Shows the list of secured jobs the user has set in the printer driver. You need to enter the user name and password set in the printer driver. Stored Job: You can print or delete a stored job. File PolicyYou can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through optional memory. If the optional memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it. 4. Special Features 312 5. Useful Management Tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine. Easy Capture Manager Samsung Easy Color Manager Samsung AnyWeb Print Easy Eco Driver Using SyncThru Web Service Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Using Samsung Printer Status Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator 315 316 317 318 319 322 327 330 332 Easy Capture Manager Available for Windows OS users only. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7). Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key. Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited. 5. Useful Management Tools 315 Samsung Easy Color Manager Samsung Easy Color Manager helps users do fine adjustments with 6 color tones and other properties, such as brightness, contrast, and saturation. Color tone change can be saved as a profile and can be used from the driver or from inside of the machine. Available for Windows and Macintosh OS users only. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7). Helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like. To download the latest Samsung Easy Color Manager, go to the Samsung website:
www.samsung.com/support > Find Useful Software > Printers & Multi-function Printers downloads. 5. Useful Management Tools 316 Samsung AnyWeb Print Available for Windows OS users only. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7). This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily, than when you use an ordinary program. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version to link to the website where the tool is available for download. 5. Useful Management Tools 317 Easy Eco Driver This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7). Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 7). With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing. To use this application, Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the printer properties should be checked. Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts, changing fonts, and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset. How to use:
1 Open a document to print. 2 Print the document. A preview window appears. 3 Select the options you want to apply to the document. You can see the preview of the applied features. 4 Click Print. 5. Useful Management Tools 318 Using SyncThru Web Service Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for SyncThru Web Service. SyncThru Web Service explanation in this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Network model only (see "Software" on page 7). 1 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 2 Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 1 Accessing SyncThru Web Service 1 Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2 Your machines embedded website opens. Logging into SyncThru Web Service Before configuring options in SyncThru Web Service, you need to log-in as an administrator. You can still use SyncThru Web Service without logging in but you wont have access to Settings tab and Security tab. SyncThru Web Service overview Some tabs may not appear depending on your model. 2 Information tab This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an error report. Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their severity. Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge. 5. Useful Management Tools 319 Using SyncThru Web Service Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex and duplex. Current Settings: Shows the machines and networks information. User Access Control: Classifies users into several groups according to each users role. Each users authorization, authentication and accounting will be controlled by the groups role definition. Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports, e-mail address, and font reports. Maintenance tab Settings tab This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine. Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network environment. Sets options such as TCP/IP and network protocols. This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu. Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machines firmware. Contact Information: Shows the contact information. Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check information. 3 Security tab E-mail notification setup This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. System Security: Sets the system administrators information and also enables or disables machine features. Network Security: Sets settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x, and Authentication servers. You can receive emails about your machines status by setting this option. By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator. 5. Useful Management Tools 320 Using SyncThru Web Service Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. 1 Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2 3 Your machines embedded website opens. From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification. If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings >
Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network environment before setting e-mail notification. Select Enable check box to use the E-mail Notification. 4 5 Click Add button to add e-mail notification user. Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items you want to receive an alert for. 6 Click Apply. If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that case, contact the a network administrator. 4 Setting the system administrators information This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option. Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. 1 Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2 3 4 Your machines embedded website opens. From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location, and email address. 5 Click Apply. 5. Useful Management Tools 321 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether youre a student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom sharing scanned pictures from last years birthday party, Easy Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools. Availabe for Windows OS users only. Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator. Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you install the machine software. 5 Understanding Samsung Easy Document Creator To open the program:
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Document Creator > Samsung Easy Document Creator. The Samsung Easy Document Creator interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the table that follows:
The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using.
(Information) 1
(Help) Click the information button to see the programs version information. Click the help button to get the information of any option you want to use. 5. Useful Management Tools 322 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 2 3 Quick Scan Scan Automatically scans with the settings provided in Configuration. You can pre-set the options such as image type, document size, resolution, or file type (see "Quick Scanning" on page 324). Provides more in-depth options for scanning documents on a one-by-one basis (see "Scanning" on page 324). Text Converting will only be available after installing the optical character recognition (OCR) software proivided in a separate installation file. Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or mulitple pictures. Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents with text or text and images. Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an editable text format. Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner. SNS Upload Provides an easy and quick way to upload files to a variety of social networking sites (SNS). Scan an image directly or select an existing image to upload to Facebook, Flickr, Picasa, Google Docs, or Twitter (see "Scanning to a Social Networking Site" on page 325). 4 SNS Upload will only be available after Microsoft.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 has been installed (http://www.microsoft.com/
download/en/details.aspx?id=22) and Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher are required E-Book Conversion 5 Send Fax Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as one e-book or convert existing files into an e-book format
(.epub file) (see "Converting to an E-Book" on page 325). Provides the ability to directly fax a document from Easy Document Creator if the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is installed (see "Sending a fax in the computer" on page 301). Favorites: User-created favorites for frequently-used 6 scan settings. If the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is not installed, this will be grayed out. 7 Configuration 8 Device Name Provides the options for a Common and Quick Scan. Shows the scanning/faxing device ready to use. 5. Useful Management Tools 323 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Search If you cannot see any device ready to use, click this button to find a device. 5 Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview image. Click Search Now to automatically search for all devices to which you have access. Click the Help (
click on any option you want to know about.
) button from the upper-right corner of the window and 9 6 Using features Scanning 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 Click Scan from the home screen. 3 4 Make adjustments to the image (Scan Settings and More Options). Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start. Select to Save to Location, Send to E-mail, or Send to SNS. 6 7 Click on Save (Saving a Scan), Send ( E-mailing a Scan), or Share (
Uploading). If there is room on the document glass, more than one item can be scanned at the same time. Use the tool to make multiple selection areas. Quick Scanning Configuring Quick Scan To set up the Quick Scan options:
1 Click Configuration from the home screen. 2 Click on Default to use the default settings, or select your own options. 3 Click Apply to save changes. 5. Useful Management Tools 324 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Using Quick Scan Upload Existing File 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 Click Quick Scan from the home screen. 3 4 Click Save to save the image. Select a save location for the scanned images. Click Scan More to scan another image with the same settings. Scanning to a Social Networking Site Scan Directly 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 Click SNS Upload from the home screen. 3 Click Scan to SNS > Start. 4 Click Scan. 1 Click SNS Upload from the home screen. 2 Click Existing File to SNS > Start. 3 4 5 Follow the instructions in each social networking site. Select the site and click Add Image to find the file to upload. Select a social networking site to send the image and click Next. If there are some problems on accessing or uploading to each SNS site due to a network environment issue, it's needed to check security limitations established in your network with network administrator. To guarantee correct functioning of SNS upload in Samsung Easy Document Creator, unrestricted network environment is needed for HTTPS communication. Converting to an E-Book Scan Directly 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 Click E-Book Conversion from the home screen. 5. Useful Management Tools 325 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 3 Click Scan to E-Book > Start. 4 Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the
.epub file, a file name, and select a save location. 4 Click Send Fax. 5 Enter the fax information (recipients number, cover page information, etc). 6 Click Send. 7 Plug-ins Easy Document Creator will also create new plug-ins for Microsoft PowerPoint, Word, and Excel. These new plug-ins will be in a new Easy Document Creator menu on the applications menu bars: Scan to Office, Send Fax, and E-Book. 5 Click Save. Convert Existing Files 1 Click E-Book Conversion from the home screen. 2 Click Existing File to E-Book > Start. 3 Click Add Image to find the file to convert. 4 Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the
.epub file, a file name, and select a save location. 5 Click Save. Sending a Fax 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 60). 2 Click Send Fax from the home screen. 3 Click add file and locate the file to fax. 5. Useful Management Tools 326 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer Manager. The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the table that follows:
The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Software" on page 7). Available for Windows and Macintosh OS users only (see "Software" on page 7). For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager. Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button. 8 Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager To open the program:
For Windows, Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager. For Macintosh, Printer list 1 The Printer List displays printers installed on your computer and network printers added by network discovery (Windows only). 5. Useful Management Tools 327 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Printer information This area gives you general information about your machine. You can check information, such as the machines model name, IP address (or Port name), and machine status. You can view the online Users Guide. Troubleshooting button: This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs. You can directly open the necessary section in the users guide. Application information Includes links for changing to the advanced settings
(switching UI), refresh, preference setting, summary, help, and about. button is used to change the user The interface to the advanced settings user interface
(see "Advanced settings user interface overview"
on page 328). 2 3 4 5 6 9 Quick links Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This section also includes links to applications in the advanced settings. If you connect your machine to a network, the SyncThru Web Service icon is enabled. Contents area Displays information about the selected machine, remaining toner level, and paper. The information will vary based on the machine selected. Some machines do not have this feature. Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window. You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online. Select the Help menu or click the any option you want to know about. button from the window and click on Advanced settings user interface overview The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible for managing the network and machines. 5. Useful Management Tools 328 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. Device Settings You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, network, and print information. Scan to PC Settings This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles. Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device. Basic tab: Contains settings related general scan and devicesettings. Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering. Fax to PC Settings This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected device. Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device. Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and allow more options to be set. Alert Settings (Windows only) This menu includes settings related to error alerting. Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received. Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email. Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts. Job Accounting Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user. This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting software such as SyncThru or CounThru admin software. 5. Useful Management Tools 329 Using Samsung Printer Status The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status. Icon Mean Description The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this users guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use. Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine
(see "Specifications" on page 141). Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 7). Normal Warning The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no errors or warnings. The machine is in a state where an error might occur in the future. For example, it might be in toner low status, which may lead to toner empty status. Error The machine has at least one error. 10 Samsung Printer Status overview If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install the machine software. You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button. These icons appear on the Windows task bar:
Toner Level 1 You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge. The machine and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use. Some machines do not have this feature. 2 Option You can set printing job alert related settings. 5. Useful Management Tools 330 Using Samsung Printer Status 3 4 Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online. Users Guide You can view the online Users Guide. This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs. You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the users guide. 5 Close Close the window. 5. Useful Management Tools 331 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator (see "Installation for Linux" on page 176). 11 After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop. Opening Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop. You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator. 2 Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window. 1 Printer Configuration 2 Port Configuration 5. Useful Management Tools 332 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator To use the on screen help, the Help or button from the window. Printers tab 3 After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator. View the current systems printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window. 12 Printers configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes. 1 2 3 Switches to Printers configuration. Shows all of the installed machines. Shows the status, model name, and URI of your machine. 5. Useful Management Tools 333 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator The printer control buttons are, as follows:
Classes tab Refresh: Renews the available machines list. Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines. Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine. Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine. Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine. Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly. Properties: Allows you to view and change the printers properties. The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes. 1 2 Shows all of the machine classes. Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class. Refresh: Renews the classes list. Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class. Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class. 5. Useful Management Tools 334 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator 13 Ports configuration In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason. 1 2 3 Switches to Ports configuration. Shows all of the available ports. Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status. Refresh: Renews the available ports list. Release port: Releases the selected port. 5. Useful Management Tools 335 6. Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. Paper feeding problems Power and cable connecting problems Printing problems Printing quality problems Copying problems Scanning problems Faxing problems Operating system problems 337 338 339 343 351 352 354 356 For errors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings, refer to the troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless network" on page 225). Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam. Paper sticks together. Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray. Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper. Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together. Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight. Paper does not feed into the machine. Remove any obstructions from inside the machine. Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. The paper keeps jamming. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the manual feeding in tray. An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris. Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes. 6. Troubleshooting 337 Power and cable connecting problems Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems. Condition The machine is not receiving power, or the connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Suggested solutions Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
(Power) button on the control, press it. Disconnect the machines cable and reconnect it. 6. Troubleshooting 338 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print. The machine is not receiving power. Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a button on the control, press it.
(Power) The machine is not selected as the default machine. Select your machine as your default machine in Windows. Check the machine for the following:
The cover is not closed. Close the cover. Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 119). No paper is loaded. Load paper (see "Loading paper in the tray" on page 49). The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). If a system error occurs, contact your service representative. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Rear view" on page 24). The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective. If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different machine cable. The port setting is incorrect. Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one. 6. Troubleshooting 339 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print. The machine may be configured incorrectly. Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct. The printer driver may be incorrectly installed. Uninstall and reinstall the machines driver. The machine is malfunctioning. Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. Contact a service representative. The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job. Get more hard disk space and print the document again. The output tray is full. Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing. The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source. The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect. For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on page 67). A print job is extremely slow. The job may be very complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings. Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be incorrect. The paper size and the paper size settings do not match. The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete. The machine cable is loose or defective. Change the page orientation in your application (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on page 67). Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray. Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable. 6. Troubleshooting 340 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The wrong printer driver was selected. Check the applications printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected. The software application is malfunctioning. Try printing a job from another application. The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again. Pages print, but they are blank. The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner. Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the toner cartridge. See "Redistributing toner" on page 93. See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95. The file may have blank pages. Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages. Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective. Contact a service representative. Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The resolution of the photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced. Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing. This is not a problem. Just keep printing. The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. The print quality of photos is not good. Images are not clear. Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray. 6. Troubleshooting 341 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print special-sized paper, such as billing paper. The printed billing paper is curled. Paper size and paper size setting do not match. Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 66). The paper type setting does not match. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). 6. Troubleshooting 342 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem. Condition Light or faded print Suggested solutions If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver. A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine
(see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. The top half of the paper is printed lighter than the rest of the paper The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 66). 6. Troubleshooting 343 Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Toner specks A aB bC c A aB bC c A aB bC c A aB bC c A aB bC c Dropouts A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C White Spots The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job. The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. If white spots appear on the page:
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. 6. Troubleshooting 344 Printing quality problems Condition Vertical lines Suggested solutions If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. Black or color background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
Change to a lighter weight paper. Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading. Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). Thoroughly redistribute the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 93). Toner smear Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). Check the paper type and quality. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). 6. Troubleshooting 345 Printing quality problems Condition Vertical repetitive defects Background scatter A Suggested solutions If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages. The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative. Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page. The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture. If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems. Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example:
If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem. If you are using a new toner cartridge, redistribute the toner first (see "Redistributing toner" on page 93). Toner particles are around bold characters or pictures The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 66). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem. 6. Troubleshooting 346 Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Misformed characters If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper. Page skew A aBb C A aBb C A aBb C A aBb C A aBb C c Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl. Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray. 6. Troubleshooting 347 Printing quality problems Condition Wrinkles or creases Suggested solutions Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray. Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). Solid color or black pages A The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative. 6. Troubleshooting 348 Printing quality problems Condition Loose toner Suggested solutions Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). Check the paper type and quality. Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Character voids A Horizontal stripes Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:
You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around. The paper may not meet paper specifications. If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 95). If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative. 6. Troubleshooting 349 Printing quality problems Condition Curl Suggested solutions If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray. Change the printers paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 66). An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets Loose toner Light printor contamination occurs Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above. The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for your machine (see
"Altitude adjustment" on page 266). 6. Troubleshooting 350 Copying problems Condition Suggested solutions Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies (see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 71). Smears, lines, marks, or spots appear on copies. If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies. If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 109). Copy image is skewed. Blank copies print out. Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide. The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 105). Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder. If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. Image rubs off the copy easily. Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package. In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time. Frequent copy paper jams occur. Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if necessary. Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner. Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight (see "Print media specifications" on page 143). Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared. Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other documents that use more toner. The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made. Turn the machine off and back on. 6. Troubleshooting 351 Scanning problems Condition Suggested solutions The scanner does not work. Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see
"Loading originals" on page 60). There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution rate. Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly. Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the printer cable. Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001). Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed. Graphics are scanned more slowly than text. Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how to set BIOS, refer to your computer users guide. The unit scans very slowly. 6. Troubleshooting 352 Scanning problems Suggested solutions There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished. The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again. The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off. The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly. Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer. The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off. Condition Message appears on your computer screen:
Device cant be set to the H/W mode you want. Port is being used by another program. Port is disabled. Scanner is busy receiving or printing data. When the current job is completed, try again. Invalid handle. Scanning has failed. 6. Troubleshooting 353 Faxing problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not working, there is no display, or the buttons are not working. Unplug the power cord and plug it in again. Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet. Ensure that the power is turned on. No dial tone. Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 24). Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone. The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly. The original does not feed into the machine. Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list. Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick or thin. Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed. The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative (see "Available maintenance parts" on page 90). Faxes are not received automatically. The receiving mode should be set to fax (see "Changing the receive modes" on page 305). Make sure that there is paper in the tray (see "Print media specifications" on page 143). Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem. The machine does not send. Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass. Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax. The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor-quality. The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty. A noisy phone line can cause line errors. Check your machine by making a copy. A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"
on page 95). 6. Troubleshooting 354 Faxing problems Condition Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched. There are lines on the originals you sent. The machine dials a number, but the connection with the other fax machine fails. Faxes do not store in memory. Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages, with a small strip of text at the top. The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam. Suggested solutions Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 109). The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and ask them to solve the problem on their side. There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service. You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again. 6. Troubleshooting 355 Operating system problems Common Windows problems Condition File in Use message appears during installation. General Protection Fault, Exception OE, Spool 32, or Illegal Operation messages appear. Fail To Print, A printer timeout error occurred message appear. Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver. Suggested solutions Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again. These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred. Refer to the Microsoft Windows Users Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages. 1 6. Troubleshooting 356 Operating system problems Common Macintosh problems Condition The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. Suggested solutions It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. Some letters are not displayed normally during cover page printing. Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the cover page. When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly. Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader. Refer to the Macintosh Users Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages. 2 6. Troubleshooting 357 Operating system problems Common Linux problems 3 Condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print. Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in the Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device. Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine from the printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped, press the Start button. Normal operation of the machine should be restored. The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occur. Check if your application has special print options such as -oraw. If -oraw is specified in the command line parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select print -> Setup printer and edit the command line parameter in the command item. Some color images come out all black. This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com. Some color images come out in unexpected color. This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com. The machine does not print whole pages, and output is printed on half the page. It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem. 6. Troubleshooting 358 Operating system problems Condition I cannot scan via Gimp Front-
end. Suggested solutions Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane:Device dialog. on the Acquire menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page. For the detailed information, refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end application. If you wish to use another kind of scan application, refer to applications Help. Cannot open port device file error message appears when printing a document. Avoid changing print job parameters (e.q., via LPR GUI) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in the Port configuration window. The machine does not appear on the scanners list. Ensure your machine is attached to your computer, connected properly via the USB port, and is turned on. Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system. Open Unified Linux Driver configurator, switch to Scanners configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine's name is listed in the window. Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user will encounter device busy response. This usually happens when starting a scan procedure. An appropriate message box appears. To identify the source of the problem, open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner, port's symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start at /dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you can see if the port is occupied by another application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button, if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly. The machine does not scan. Ensure a document is loaded into the machine, ensure your machine is connected to the computer. If there is an I/O error while scanning. 6. Troubleshooting 359 Operating system problems Refer to the Linux Users Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages. 4 Common PostScript problems The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used. Problem Possible cause Solution The PostScript file cannot be printed The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly. Install the PostScript driver (see "Software Installation" on page 173). Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing. If the problem persists, contact a service representative. Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex. You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory. A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript. Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine. The optional tray is not selected in the driver The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray. Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device Options tab, and set the tray option (see "Setting Device Options" on page 99). When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly The resolution setting in the printer driver may not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader. Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader. 6. Troubleshooting 360 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center. Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) CAMEROON 7095-0077 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/ca www.samsung.com/
ca_fr (French) www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com ALBANIA 42 27 5755 ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 ARMENIA AUSTRALIA AUSTRIA 0-800-05-555 1300 362 603 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, 0.07/min) AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 8000-4726 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com CANADA CHILE CHINA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) From mobile 02-482 82 00 400-810-5858 COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 COTE DLVOIRE 8000 0077 BAHRAIN BELARUS BELGIUM BOLIVIA BOSNIA BRAZIL 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com 02-201-24-18 800-10-7260 05 133 1999 0800-124-421 4004-0000 www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch) www.samsung.com/
be_fr (French) www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com CROATIA CYPRUS 062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864) www.samsung.com 8009 4000 only from landline www.samsung.com 800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com CZECH REPUBLIC Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak, s.r.o., Oasis Florenc, Sokolovsk 394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DENMARK DOMINICA ECUADOR EGYPT 70 70 19 70 1-800-751-2676 1-800-10-7267 08000-726786 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com BULGARIA 07001 33 11 www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 361 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site EIRE 0818 717100 EL SALVADOR ESTONIA FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY 800-6225 800-7267 030-6227 515 01 48 63 00 00 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 0,14/min) GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 GHANA GREECE 0800-10077 0302-200077 80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726 7864) only from land line
(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile and land line GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 HONDURAS 800-27919267
(852) 3698-4698 HONG KONG www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/hk www.samsung.com/
hk_en/
HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com INDIA INDONESIA IRAN ITALY JAMAICA JAPAN JORDAN 1800 1100 11 3030 8282 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 0800-112-8888 021-5699-7777 021-8255 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com 1-800-234-7267 0120-327-527 800-22273 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:7799) www.samsung.com KENYA KOSOVO KUWAIT 0800 724 000
+381 0113216899 183-2255 KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 LATVIA 8000-7267 LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 362 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 MACEDONIA 023 207 777 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com PHILIPPINES 00-800-500-55-500 MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 MOROCCO NIGERIA 080 100 2255 0800-726-7864 NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864)
( 0,10/min) www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com POLAND 1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for PLDT 1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Digitel 1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Globe 02-5805777 0 801-1 SAMSUNG (172-678)
+48 22 607-93-33 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com PORTUGAL 808 20-SAMSUNG (808 20 7267) www.samsung.com PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 815-56 480 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com ROMANIA 08010 SAMSUNG (08010 726 7864) only from landline
(+40) 21 206 01 10 from mobile and land line 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com 800-7267 0-800-777-08 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 SAUDI ARABIA 9200-21230 800-00-0077 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com MEXICO MOLDOVA MONGOLIA NORWAY OMAN PANAMA PERU SENEGAL SERBIA SINGAPORE SLOVAKIA 0700 SAMSUNG (0700 726 7864) www.samsung.com 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com 0800-SAMSUNG (0800-726-7864) www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 363 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site SOUTH AFRICA 0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com 0-800-502-000 UKRAINE www.samsung.com/ua www.samsung.com/
ua_ru SPAIN SWEDEN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678) www.samsung.com 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ch www.samsung.com/
ch_fr(French) TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com TAIWAN TANZANIA THAILAND TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO TURKEY U.A.E UGANDA U.K U.S.A 0800-329-999 0266-026-066 0685 88 99 00 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com 444 77 11 www.samsung.com 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com 0800-300 300 www.samsung.com 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 364 Glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this users guide. ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once. 802.11 AppleTalk 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. 802.11b/g/n BIT Depth 802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices. Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals. A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white. BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform. Glossary 365 Glossary BOOTP Coverage Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system. It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage. CCD Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine. CSV Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms. Collation DADF Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies. A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper. Control Panel A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine. Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized. Glossary 366 Glossary DHCP DPI A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts. DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data. DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network. Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size. DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle. DNS Duty Cycle The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet. Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter. Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day. Glossary 367 Glossary ECM EtherTalk Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise. A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. Emulation FDI Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state. Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present. Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine. FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet). Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer. Glossary 368 Glossary Gateway IEEE A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity. Grayscale IEEE 1284 A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray. The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer). Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots. Mass storage device Mass storage device, commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-
volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces. Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website. IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard. Glossary 369 Glossary IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute. IPP ITU-T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication. The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones. ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions. IPX/SPX JBIG IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN). ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards. Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web. Glossary 370 Glossary LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP. LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine. MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks. MFP Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc. MH Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes. MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-
T T.6. Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information. MR Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted. Glossary 371 Glossary NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX. OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper. Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else. OSI Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical. PABX A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise. PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers. PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format. Glossary 372 Glossary PostScript Protocol PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image. A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints. Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer. PS See PostScript. PSTN Print Media The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier. The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard. PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute. PRN file An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access. Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution. Glossary 373 Glossary SMB TCP/IP Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism. The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server. SSID Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters. Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address. TCR Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions. TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications. Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper. Glossary 374 Glossary TWAIN Watermark An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting. UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals. WIA Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP. Glossary 375 Glossary WPA-PSK WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security. WPS The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer. XPS XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-
independent document format. Glossary 376 Index A accessories installing ordering address book editing general setup group editing group registering registering using address book setup administrators setup AirPrint AnyWeb Print authorized users registering B buttons Darkness eco id copy numeric keypad scan to C cleaning inside outside pickup roller scan unit cleaning a machine clear button control panel touch screen convention copy general setup copying basic copying reducing or enlarging copies 99 89 270 257 271 271 270 270 270 260 230 317 273 custom setup D default settings tray setting direct printing utility 26 28 2627 2729 2628 106 105 108 109 105 29 26 40 15 235 70 71 261 57 283 divice options document box general setup driver installation Unix E easy document creator configuration convert e-book device name e-book conversion plug-in quick scan quick scanning scan scanning search send fax SNS scanning SNS upload Eco eco printing email 99 258 258 189 322 323 325 323 323 326 323 324 323 324 324 323326 325 323 262 67 Index 377 Index general setup email address searching storing entering character error message F favorites settings, for printing fax 257 267 268 267 269 133 66 302 300 303 306 302 adding documents to a reserved fax automatic redialing canceling a reserved fax job changing the receive modes delaying a fax transmission forwarding a received fax to another 304 destination forwarding a sent fax to another destination 303 241 general setup printing faxes on both sides of the paper 309 Printing sent fax report automatically 310 305 receiving a fax in the computer 309 receiving faxes in memory receiving in Answering Machine mode307 307 receiving in DRPD mode 307 receiving in Fax mode 308 receiving in secure mode 307 receiving in Tel mode 307 receiving with ext. telephone 300 redialing the last number 301 sending a fax in the computer 303 sending a priority fax sending faxes on both sides of paper 305 300 fax feature fax sending multi sending faxing adjusting darkness adjusting resolution preparing to fax receiving in Fax mode features machine features print media feature front view 76 78 77 75 77 5 232 144 22 G general icons general settings glossary H help button I id copy J jam clearing original document clearing paper tips for avoiding paper jams L LCD display 15 248 365 30 72 114 119 113 browsing the machine status235240241 244246254 Linux common Linux problems 358 driver installation for network connected Index 378 Index 188 driver installation for USB cable connected 176 driver reinstallation for USB cable connected 177 287 285 297 154 332 182 297 printer properties printing scanning system requirements unifled driver configurator using SetIP linux scanning loading paper in multi-purpose tray paper in the tray1 special media loading originals M 51 48 53 59 machine information 246 machine setup 235240241244 254 machine status 235240241244246 254 Macintosh common Macintosh problems 357 driver installation for network connected 186 driver installation for USB cable connected 174 driver reinstallation for USB cable connected 175 284 296 153 181 296 90 printing scanning system requirements using SetIP macintosh scanning maintenance parts memory memory upgrading memory/hard drive feature menu overview multi-purpose tray loading using special media N network driver installation Linux 101 311312 36 51 53 188 Macintosh UNIX Windows general setup installing environment introducing network programs IPv6 configuration SetIP program wired network setup wireless network setup 186 189 183 258 156 179 192 180181182220 180 195 n-up printing Macintosh O optional tray loading paper ordering output support overlay printing create delete print 284 89 48 89 58 280 280 280 Index 379 Index P Parallel ordering placing a machine adjusting the altitude postScript driver troubleshooting preparing originals type print general setup mobile OS mobileprint print media card stock envelope labels output support photo paper preprinted paper setting the paper size setting the paper type special media transparency print menu print resolution set Linux printer preferences Linux printer status general information printing changing the default print settings Linux Macintosh multiple pages on one sheet of paper Macintosh printing a document Windows printing on both sides of paper Macintosh printing to a file setting as a default machine special printer features UNIX USB memory using direct printing utility printing a document Linux 286 287 330 274 285 284 284 63 285 275 274 276 287 81 283 285 89 266 360 59 234 229 229 56 54 56 144 57 57 57 57 53 55 234 Macintosh UNIX printing feature problem operating system problems problems copying problems faxing problems paper feeding problems power problems printing problems printing quality problems scanning problems R rear view regulatiory information reports 284 287 274 356 351 354 337 338 339 343 352 24 157 machine information 235241242243 246 249254255262 30 reset button resolution faxing 77 Index 380 Index S safety information symbols Samsung Printer Status scan general setup Scan Assitant scan feature Scanning 16 16 330 245 295 290 Scanning with Samsung Scan Assitant 295 scanning 290 basic information 297 Linux scanning 296 Macintosh scanning Scanning from image editing program294 Scanning from network connected machine 291 292 293 295 80 68 361 Scanning to email Scanning to FTP/SMB server Scanning using the WIA driver USB flash memory secu printing service contact numbers SetIP program Special features specifications print media status Storing supplies available supplies estimated toner cartridge life monitoring the supplies life ordering replacing toner cartridge SyncThru Web Service general information SyncThru Web Service T toner cartridge estimated life handling instructions non-Samsung and refilled redistributing toner replacing the cartridge storing 180220 265 141 144 2830 267 tray adjusting the width and length changing the tray size loading paper in multi-purpose tray ordering an optional tray ordering an parallel setting the paper size and type 47 47 51 89 89 57 131 87 92 103 87 95 319 319 92 91 91 93 95 91 U understanding the status LED UNIX driver installation for network connected 189 printing 287 Unix system requirements USB USB cable 154 263 driver installation driver reinstallation 3233174176 175177 USB flash memory data backup managing printing 82 83 81 Index 381 Index scanning using help W watermark create delete edit Windows 80 66285 PBC PIN wireless LED wireless network network cable 279 279 279 200 200 30 219 common Windows problems 356 driver installation for network connected 183 driver installation for USB cable connected 33 32 152 system requirements 180220 using SetIP wireless ad hoc mode Infrastructure mode USB cable WPS 195 195 202206215 PBC mode disconnectiong 199 199 WPS (the machine does not have a display screen) Index 382
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2012-04-20 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2012-04-20
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0027908797
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
19 Chapin Rd., Building D
|
||||
1 |
Pine Brook, NJ
|
|||||
1 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@pctestlab.com
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
A3L
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
CLX4195FW
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
J******** C****
|
||||
1 | Title |
General Manager
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
973-8********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
973-8********
|
||||
1 |
j******@samsung.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
PCTEST Engineering Lab., Inc.
|
||||
1 | Name |
R****** O****
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
6660-B Dobbin Road
|
||||
1 |
Columbia, Maryland 21045
|
|||||
1 |
United States
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 |
t******@pctestlab.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Color Multi-function Printer | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | Name |
N****** P****
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
82-31******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 |
p******@samsung.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | 16 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC